removed trailing whitespace in Doxygen files
git-svn-id: https://svn.wxwidgets.org/svn/wx/wxWidgets/trunk@52634 c3d73ce0-8a6f-49c7-b76d-6d57e0e08775
This commit is contained in:
parent
7df4c51f60
commit
3c4f71cc3d
184 changed files with 4902 additions and 4902 deletions
|
|
@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ The following are relevant to the GDI (Graphics Device Interface).
|
|||
|
||||
@warning These functions are deprecated, use the wxClipboard class instead.
|
||||
|
||||
These clipboard functions are implemented for Windows only.
|
||||
These clipboard functions are implemented for Windows only.
|
||||
|
||||
@header{wx/clipbrd.h}
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -29,7 +29,7 @@
|
|||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_cppconst_guisystem GUI system
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@beginDefList
|
||||
@itemdef{__WINDOWS__, any Windows, you may also use __WXMSW__}
|
||||
@itemdef{__WIN16__, Win16 API (not supported since wxWidgets 2.6)}
|
||||
|
|
@ -48,7 +48,7 @@
|
|||
@itemdef{__WXMOTIF20__, Motif 2.0 or higher}
|
||||
@itemdef{__WXMAC__, Mac OS all targets}
|
||||
@itemdef{__WXMAC_CLASSIC__, MacOS for Classic}
|
||||
@itemdef{__WXMAC_CARBON__, MacOS for Carbon CFM (running under Classic or OSX)
|
||||
@itemdef{__WXMAC_CARBON__, MacOS for Carbon CFM (running under Classic or OSX)
|
||||
or true OS X Mach-O Builds}
|
||||
@itemdef{__WXMAC_OSX__, MacOS X Carbon Mach-O Builds}
|
||||
@itemdef{__WXMGL__, SciTech Soft MGL (__WXUNIVERSAL__ will be also defined)}
|
||||
|
|
@ -64,33 +64,33 @@
|
|||
to one of the symbols above so this should be tested first.}
|
||||
@itemdef{__X__, any X11-based GUI toolkit except GTK+}
|
||||
@endDefList
|
||||
|
||||
There are two wxWidgets ports to Mac OS. One of them, wxMac, exists in two versions:
|
||||
Classic and Carbon. The Classic version is the only one to work on Mac OS version 8.
|
||||
|
||||
There are two wxWidgets ports to Mac OS. One of them, wxMac, exists in two versions:
|
||||
Classic and Carbon. The Classic version is the only one to work on Mac OS version 8.
|
||||
The Carbon version may be built either as CFM or Mach-O (binary format, like ELF)
|
||||
and the former may run under OS 9 while the latter only runs under OS X.
|
||||
Finally, there is a new Cocoa port which can only be used under OS X. To
|
||||
summarize:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@li If you want to test for all Mac platforms, classic and OS X, you
|
||||
should test both @c __WXMAC__ and @c __WXCOCOA__.
|
||||
@li If you want to test for any GUI Mac port under OS X, use
|
||||
@c __WXOSX__.
|
||||
@li If you want to test for any port under Mac OS X, including, for
|
||||
example, wxGTK and also wxBase, use @c __DARWIN__ (see below).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The convention is to use the @c __WX prefix for these
|
||||
symbols, although this has not always been followed.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_cppconst_os Operating systems
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@beginDefList
|
||||
@itemdef{__APPLE__, any Mac OS version}
|
||||
@itemdef{__AIX__, AIX}
|
||||
@itemdef{__BSD__, Any *BSD system}
|
||||
@itemdef{__CYGWIN__, Cygwin: Unix on Win32}
|
||||
@itemdef{__DARWIN__, Mac OS X using the BSD Unix C library
|
||||
@itemdef{__DARWIN__, Mac OS X using the BSD Unix C library
|
||||
(as opposed to using the Metrowerks MSL C/C++ library)}
|
||||
@itemdef{__DATA_GENERAL__, DG-UX}
|
||||
@itemdef{__DOS_GENERAL__, DOS (used with wxMGL only)}
|
||||
|
|
@ -116,12 +116,12 @@
|
|||
@endDefList
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_cppconst_cpu Hardware architectures (CPU)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Note that not all of these symbols are always defined, it depends on the
|
||||
compiler used.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@beginDefList
|
||||
@itemdef{__ALPHA__, DEC Alpha architecture}
|
||||
@itemdef{__INTEL__, Intel i386 or compatible}
|
||||
|
|
@ -130,9 +130,9 @@
|
|||
@endDefList
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_cppconst_hardware Hardware type
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@beginDefList
|
||||
@itemdef{__SMARTPHONE__, Generic mobile devices with phone buttons and a small display}
|
||||
@itemdef{__PDA__, Personal digital assistant, usually with touch screen}
|
||||
|
|
@ -144,9 +144,9 @@
|
|||
@endDefList
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_cppconst_compiler Compilers
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@beginDefList
|
||||
@itemdef{__BORLANDC__, Borland C++. The value of the macro corresponds
|
||||
to the compiler version: $500$ is $5.0$.}
|
||||
|
|
@ -159,10 +159,10 @@
|
|||
@itemdef{__SUNCC__, Sun CC, see also wxCHECK_SUNCC_VERSION}
|
||||
@itemdef{__SYMANTECC__, Symantec C++}
|
||||
@itemdef{__VISAGECPP__, IBM Visual Age (OS/2)}
|
||||
@itemdef{__VISUALC__, Microsoft Visual C++, see also wxCHECK_VISUALC_VERSION.
|
||||
The value of this macro corresponds to the compiler version:
|
||||
@c 1020 for @c 4.2 (the first supported version), @c 1100 for
|
||||
@c 5.0, @c 1200 for @c 6.0 and so on. For convenience, the symbols
|
||||
@itemdef{__VISUALC__, Microsoft Visual C++, see also wxCHECK_VISUALC_VERSION.
|
||||
The value of this macro corresponds to the compiler version:
|
||||
@c 1020 for @c 4.2 (the first supported version), @c 1100 for
|
||||
@c 5.0, @c 1200 for @c 6.0 and so on. For convenience, the symbols
|
||||
__VISUALCn__ are also defined for each major compiler version from
|
||||
5 to 9, i.e. you can use tests such @ifdef_ __VISUALC7__ to test
|
||||
for compiler version being precisely 7.}
|
||||
|
|
@ -173,17 +173,17 @@
|
|||
@endDefList
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_cppconst_featuretests Feature tests
|
||||
|
||||
Some library features may not be always available even if they were selected
|
||||
|
||||
Some library features may not be always available even if they were selected
|
||||
by the user. To make it possible to check if this is the case, the library
|
||||
predefines the symbols in the form @c wxHAS_FEATURE. Unlike
|
||||
predefines the symbols in the form @c wxHAS_FEATURE. Unlike
|
||||
@c wxUSE_FEATURE symbols which are defined by the library user (directly
|
||||
in @c setup.h or by running configure script) and which must be always
|
||||
defined as either $0$ or $1$, the @c wxHAS symbols are only defined if
|
||||
the corresponding feature is available and not defined at all otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Currently the following symbols exist:
|
||||
|
||||
@beginDefList
|
||||
|
|
@ -198,15 +198,15 @@
|
|||
@endDefList
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_cppconst_miscellaneous Miscellaneous
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@beginDefList
|
||||
@itemdef{__WXWINDOWS__,
|
||||
always defined in wxWidgets applications, see also wxCHECK_VERSION}
|
||||
@itemdef{__WXDEBUG__, defined in debug mode, undefined in release mode}
|
||||
@itemdef{wxUSE_XXX,
|
||||
if defined as $1$, feature XXX is active, see the
|
||||
if defined as $1$, feature XXX is active, see the
|
||||
@ref page_wxusedef (the symbols of this form are always defined,
|
||||
use @if_ and not @ifdef_ to test for them)}
|
||||
@itemdef{WX_PRECOMP,
|
||||
|
|
@ -227,20 +227,20 @@
|
|||
building wxBase code, either as a standalone library or as part of the
|
||||
monolithic wxWidgets library, defined as $0$ when building GUI library only)}
|
||||
@itemdef{wxNO_RTTI, is defined if the compiler RTTI support has been switched off}
|
||||
@itemdef{wxNO_EXCEPTIONS,
|
||||
@itemdef{wxNO_EXCEPTIONS,
|
||||
is defined if the compiler support for C++ exceptions has been switched off}
|
||||
@itemdef{wxNO_THREADS,
|
||||
@itemdef{wxNO_THREADS,
|
||||
if this macro is defined, the compilation options
|
||||
don't include compiler flags needed for multithreaded code generation. This
|
||||
implies that wxUSE_THREADS is $0$ and also that other (non-wx-based) threading
|
||||
packages cannot be used neither.}
|
||||
@itemdef{WXMAKINGDLL_XXX,
|
||||
@itemdef{WXMAKINGDLL_XXX,
|
||||
used internally and defined when building the
|
||||
library @c XXX as a DLL; when a monolithic wxWidgets build is used only a
|
||||
single @c WXMAKINGDLL symbol is defined}
|
||||
@itemdef{WXUSINGDLL,
|
||||
@itemdef{WXUSINGDLL,
|
||||
defined when compiling code which uses wxWidgets as a DLL/shared library}
|
||||
@itemdef{WXBUILDING,
|
||||
@itemdef{WXBUILDING,
|
||||
defined when building wxWidgets itself, whether as a static or shared library}
|
||||
@endDefList
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -10,12 +10,12 @@
|
|||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
@page page_keycodes Keycodes
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@header{wx/defs.h}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Keypresses are represented by an enumerated type, wxKeyCode. The possible
|
||||
values are the ASCII character codes, plus the following:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@verbatim
|
||||
WXK_BACK = 8
|
||||
WXK_TAB = 9
|
||||
|
|
@ -23,7 +23,7 @@
|
|||
WXK_ESCAPE = 27
|
||||
WXK_SPACE = 32
|
||||
WXK_DELETE = 127
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
// These are by design not compatible with unicode characters.
|
||||
// If you want to get a unicode character from a key event use
|
||||
// wxKeyEvent::GetUnicodeKey instead.
|
||||
|
|
@ -95,7 +95,7 @@
|
|||
WXK_SCROLL
|
||||
WXK_PAGEUP,
|
||||
WXK_PAGEDOWN,
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WXK_NUMPAD_SPACE,
|
||||
WXK_NUMPAD_TAB,
|
||||
WXK_NUMPAD_ENTER,
|
||||
|
|
@ -121,13 +121,13 @@
|
|||
WXK_NUMPAD_SUBTRACT,
|
||||
WXK_NUMPAD_DECIMAL,
|
||||
WXK_NUMPAD_DIVIDE,
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
// the following key codes are only generated under Windows currently
|
||||
WXK_WINDOWS_LEFT,
|
||||
WXK_WINDOWS_RIGHT,
|
||||
WXK_WINDOWS_MENU,
|
||||
WXK_COMMAND,
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
// Hardware-specific buttons
|
||||
WXK_SPECIAL1 = 193,
|
||||
WXK_SPECIAL2,
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -10,11 +10,11 @@
|
|||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
@page page_keymodifiers Key Modifiers
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@header{wx/defs.h}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The following key modifier constants are defined:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@verbatim
|
||||
enum wxKeyModifier
|
||||
{
|
||||
|
|
@ -32,11 +32,11 @@
|
|||
wxMOD_ALL = 0xffff
|
||||
};
|
||||
@endverbatim
|
||||
|
||||
Notice that @c wxMOD_CMD should be used instead of @c wxMOD_CONTROL
|
||||
in portable code to account for the fact that although
|
||||
|
||||
Notice that @c wxMOD_CMD should be used instead of @c wxMOD_CONTROL
|
||||
in portable code to account for the fact that although
|
||||
@c Control modifier exists under Mac OS, it is not used for the same
|
||||
purpose as under Windows or Unix there while the special Mac-specific
|
||||
purpose as under Windows or Unix there while the special Mac-specific
|
||||
@c Command modifier is used in exactly the same way.
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -10,15 +10,15 @@
|
|||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
@page page_languagecodes Language identifiers
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The following wxLanguage constants may be used to specify the language
|
||||
in wxLocale::Init and are returned by wxLocale::GetSystemLanguage:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<!-- generated code begins here -->
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This enum is generated by misc/languages/genlang.py
|
||||
When making changes, please put them into misc/languages/langtabl.txt
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<!-- generated code ends here -->
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -13,26 +13,26 @@
|
|||
|
||||
wxWidgets defines a special identifier value @c wxID_ANY which is used in
|
||||
the following two situations:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@li when creating a new window you may specify @c wxID_ANY to let
|
||||
wxWidgets assign an unused identifier to it automatically
|
||||
@li when installing an event handler using either the event table
|
||||
macros or wxEvtHandler::Connect,
|
||||
you may use it to indicate that you want to handle the events
|
||||
coming from any control, regardless of its identifier
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Another standard special identifier value is @c wxID_NONE: this is a value
|
||||
which is not matched by any other id.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxWidgets also defines a few standard command identifiers which may be used by
|
||||
the user code and also are sometimes used by wxWidgets itself. These reserved
|
||||
identifiers are all in the range between @c wxID_LOWEST and
|
||||
identifiers are all in the range between @c wxID_LOWEST and
|
||||
@c wxID_HIGHEST and, accordingly, the user code should avoid defining its
|
||||
own constants in this range.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@verbatim
|
||||
wxID_LOWEST = 4999,
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxID_OPEN,
|
||||
wxID_CLOSE,
|
||||
wxID_NEW,
|
||||
|
|
@ -55,7 +55,7 @@
|
|||
wxID_HELP_PROCEDURES,
|
||||
wxID_HELP_CONTEXT,
|
||||
wxID_CLOSE_ALL,
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxID_EDIT = 5030,
|
||||
wxID_CUT,
|
||||
wxID_COPY,
|
||||
|
|
@ -68,7 +68,7 @@
|
|||
wxID_REPLACE,
|
||||
wxID_REPLACE_ALL,
|
||||
wxID_PROPERTIES,
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxID_VIEW_DETAILS,
|
||||
wxID_VIEW_LARGEICONS,
|
||||
wxID_VIEW_SMALLICONS,
|
||||
|
|
@ -77,7 +77,7 @@
|
|||
wxID_VIEW_SORTNAME,
|
||||
wxID_VIEW_SORTSIZE,
|
||||
wxID_VIEW_SORTTYPE,
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxID_FILE = 5050,
|
||||
wxID_FILE1,
|
||||
wxID_FILE2,
|
||||
|
|
@ -88,7 +88,7 @@
|
|||
wxID_FILE7,
|
||||
wxID_FILE8,
|
||||
wxID_FILE9,
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
// Standard button IDs
|
||||
wxID_OK = 5100,
|
||||
wxID_CANCEL,
|
||||
|
|
@ -108,14 +108,14 @@
|
|||
wxID_ABORT,
|
||||
wxID_RETRY,
|
||||
wxID_IGNORE,
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxID_UP,
|
||||
wxID_DOWN,
|
||||
wxID_HOME,
|
||||
wxID_REFRESH,
|
||||
wxID_STOP,
|
||||
wxID_INDEX,
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxID_BOLD,
|
||||
wxID_ITALIC,
|
||||
wxID_JUSTIFY_CENTER,
|
||||
|
|
@ -131,7 +131,7 @@
|
|||
wxID_ZOOM_OUT,
|
||||
wxID_UNDELETE,
|
||||
wxID_REVERT_TO_SAVED,
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
// System menu IDs (used by wxUniv):
|
||||
wxID_SYSTEM_MENU = 5200,
|
||||
wxID_CLOSE_FRAME,
|
||||
|
|
@ -140,10 +140,10 @@
|
|||
wxID_MAXIMIZE_FRAME,
|
||||
wxID_ICONIZE_FRAME,
|
||||
wxID_RESTORE_FRAME,
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
// IDs used by generic file dialog (13 consecutive starting from this value)
|
||||
wxID_FILEDLGG = 5900,
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxID_HIGHEST = 5999
|
||||
@endverbatim
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -35,7 +35,7 @@
|
|||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_wxusedef_multi Generic wxUSE preprocessor symbols
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@beginDefList
|
||||
@itemdef{wxUSE_ABOUTDLG, Use wxAboutDialogInfo class.}
|
||||
@itemdef{wxUSE_ACCEL, Use wxAcceleratorTable/Entry classes and support for them in wxMenu, wxMenuBar.}
|
||||
|
|
@ -238,7 +238,7 @@
|
|||
@itemdef{wxUSE_XRC, Use XRC XML-based resource system.}
|
||||
@itemdef{wxUSE_ZIPSTREAM, Enable streams for Zip files.}
|
||||
@itemdef{wxUSE_ZLIB, Use wxZlibInput and wxZlibOutputStream classes, required by wxUSE_LIBPNG.}
|
||||
@endDefList
|
||||
@endDefList
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_wxusedef_unix wxUSE preprocessor symbols used only under Unix platforms
|
||||
|
|
@ -259,10 +259,10 @@
|
|||
@itemdef{wxUSE_NANOX, Use NanoX.}
|
||||
@itemdef{wxUSE_UNIV_TEXTCTRL, Use wxUniv's implementation of wxTextCtrl class.}
|
||||
@endDefList
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_wxusedef_gtk wxUSE preprocessor symbols used only in wxGTK port
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@beginDefList
|
||||
@itemdef{wxUSE_DETECT_SM, Use code to detect X11 session manager.}
|
||||
@itemdef{wxUSE_GTKPRINT, Use GTK+ printing support.}
|
||||
|
|
@ -271,9 +271,9 @@
|
|||
@itemdef{wxUSE_LIBHILDON, Use Hildon framework for Nokia 770. Currently has no effect. }
|
||||
@endDefList
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_wxusedef_mac wxUSE preprocessor symbols used only in wxMac port
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@beginDefList
|
||||
@itemdef{wxUSE_MAC_CRITICAL_REGION_MUTEX, See src/mac/carbon/thread.cpp file.}
|
||||
@itemdef{wxUSE_MAC_PTHREADS_MUTEX, See src/mac/carbon/thread.cpp file.}
|
||||
|
|
@ -281,24 +281,24 @@
|
|||
@itemdef{wxUSE_WEBKIT, Use wxWebKitCtrl class.}
|
||||
@endDefList
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_wxusedef_motif wxUSE preprocessor symbols used only in wxMotif port
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@beginDefList
|
||||
@itemdef{wxUSE_GADGETS, Use xmCascadeButtonGadgetClass, xmLabelGadgetClass, xmPushButtonGadgetClass and xmToggleButtonGadgetClass classes.}
|
||||
@itemdef{wxUSE_INVISIBLE_RESIZE, See src/motif/dialog.cpp file.}
|
||||
@endDefList
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_wxusedef_cocoa wxUSE preprocessor symbols used only in Cocoa port
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@beginDefList
|
||||
@itemdef{wxUSE_OBJC_UNIQUIFYING, Enable Objective-C class name uniquifying.}
|
||||
@endDefList
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_wxusedef_os2 wxUSE preprocessor symbols used only in OS2 port
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@beginDefList
|
||||
@itemdef{wxUSE_CONSOLEDEBUG, See src/os2/app.cpp file.}
|
||||
@itemdef{wxUSE_DDE, See src/os2/mimetype.cpp file.}
|
||||
|
|
@ -308,9 +308,9 @@
|
|||
@itemdef{wxUSE_RESOURCE_LOADING_IN_OS2, See src/os2/gdiimage.cpp file.}
|
||||
@endDefList
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_wxusedef_msw wxUSE preprocessor symbols used only in wxMSW port
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@beginDefList
|
||||
@itemdef{wxUSE_ACCESSIBILITY, Enable accessibility support}
|
||||
@itemdef{wxUSE_ACTIVEX, Use wxActiveXContainer and related classes.}
|
||||
|
|
@ -345,9 +345,9 @@
|
|||
@itemdef{wxUSE_XPM_IN_MSW, See also wxUSE_XPM}
|
||||
@endDefList
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_wxusedef_univ wxUSE preprocessor symbols used only in wxUniversal
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@beginDefList
|
||||
@itemdef{wxUSE_ALL_THEMES, Use all themes in wxUniversal; See wx/univ/theme.h file.}
|
||||
@itemdef{wxUSE_THEME_GTK, Use GTK+ 1-like theme in wxUniversal}
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -35,7 +35,7 @@
|
|||
Julian Smart, Robert Roebling, Vadim Zeitlin, Vaclav Slavik and many others.
|
||||
|
||||
This manual contains a class reference and topic overviews.
|
||||
For a selection of wxWidgets tutorials, please see the documentation page
|
||||
For a selection of wxWidgets tutorials, please see the documentation page
|
||||
on the wxWidgets web site: http://www.wxwidgets.org.
|
||||
|
||||
Please note that in the following, ``MS Windows" often refers to all
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ Requires @ref page_libs_wxbase.
|
|||
|
||||
This contains the Advanced User Interface docking library.
|
||||
|
||||
Requires @ref page_libs_wxadv, @ref page_libs_wxhtml, @ref page_libs_wxxml,
|
||||
Requires @ref page_libs_wxadv, @ref page_libs_wxhtml, @ref page_libs_wxxml,
|
||||
@ref page_libs_wxcore, @ref page_libs_wxbase.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ Requires @ref page_libs_wxbase.
|
|||
|
||||
This contains generic rich text control functionality.
|
||||
|
||||
Requires @ref page_libs_wxadv, @ref page_libs_wxhtml, @ref page_libs_wxxml,
|
||||
Requires @ref page_libs_wxadv, @ref page_libs_wxhtml, @ref page_libs_wxxml,
|
||||
@ref page_libs_wxcore, @ref page_libs_wxbase.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ Requires @ref page_libs_wxxml, @ref page_libs_wxcore, @ref page_libs_wxbase.
|
|||
This library contains wxXmlResource class that provides access to XML resource
|
||||
files in XRC format.
|
||||
|
||||
Requires @ref page_libs_wxadv, @ref page_libs_wxhtml, @ref page_libs_wxxml,
|
||||
Requires @ref page_libs_wxadv, @ref page_libs_wxhtml, @ref page_libs_wxxml,
|
||||
@ref page_libs_wxcore, @ref page_libs_wxbase.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -31,48 +31,48 @@
|
|||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_port_wxgtk wxGTK
|
||||
@section page_port_wxgtk wxGTK
|
||||
|
||||
@htmlonly
|
||||
<img src="gtk_logo.png" alt="GTK logo" title="GTK logo" class="logo">
|
||||
@endhtmlonly
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxGTK is a port of wxWidgets using the GTK+ library.
|
||||
It makes use of GTK+'s native widgets wherever possible and uses
|
||||
wxWidgets' generic controls when needed. GTK+ itself has been
|
||||
ported to a number of systems, but so far only the original X11
|
||||
version is supported. Support for other GTK+ backends is planned,
|
||||
such as the new DirectFB backend.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
All work is being done on GTK+ version 2.0 and above. Support for
|
||||
GTK+ 1.2 will be deprecated in a later release.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
You will need GTK+ 2.0 or higher which is available from:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
http://www.gtk.org
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The newer version of GTK+ you use, the more native widgets and
|
||||
features will be utilized. We have gone to a great extent to
|
||||
allow compiling wxWidgets applications with a latest version of
|
||||
GTK+, with the resulting binary working on systems even with a
|
||||
much lower version of GTK+. You will have to ensure that the
|
||||
application is launched with lazy symbol binding for that.
|
||||
|
||||
In order to configure wxWidgets to compile wxGTK you will
|
||||
|
||||
In order to configure wxWidgets to compile wxGTK you will
|
||||
need use the @c --with-gtk argument to the @c configure script.
|
||||
This is the default for many systems.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GTK+ 1.2 can still be used, albeit discouraged. For that you can
|
||||
pass @c --with-gtk=1 to the @c configure script.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
For further information, please see the files in docs/gtk
|
||||
in the distribution.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_port_wxmac wxMac
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_port_wxmac wxMac
|
||||
|
||||
@htmlonly
|
||||
<img src="osxleopard_logo.png" alt="Mac OS X (Leopard) logo"
|
||||
title="Mac OS X (Leopard) logo" class="logo">
|
||||
|
|
@ -88,15 +88,15 @@
|
|||
API (and optionally the Classic API under MacOS 8.X). You
|
||||
will need wxWidgets version 2.3.3 or higher for a stable
|
||||
version of wxMac.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
For further information, please see the files in docs/mac
|
||||
in the distribution.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_port_wxmgl wxMGL
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_port_wxmgl wxMGL
|
||||
|
||||
wxMGL is a port of wxWidgets using the MGL library available
|
||||
from SciTech as the underlying graphics backend. wxMGL draws
|
||||
its widgets using the wxUniversal widget set which is now
|
||||
|
|
@ -104,35 +104,35 @@
|
|||
including DOS, Linux hardware (similar to the Linux framebuffer)
|
||||
and various graphics systems such as Win32, X11 and OS/2.
|
||||
Note that currently MGL for Linux runs only on x86-based systems.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
You will need wxWidgets 2.3.3 or higher and MGL 5.0 or higher.
|
||||
The latter is available from
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
http://www.scitechsoft.com/products/product_download.html
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
In order to configure wxWidgets to compile wxMGL you will
|
||||
need to type:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@verbatim configure --with-mgl --with-universal @endverbatim
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Under DOS, wxMGL uses a dmake based make system.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
For further information, please see the files in docs/mgl
|
||||
in the distribution.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_port_wxos2 wxOS2
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_port_wxos2 wxOS2
|
||||
|
||||
wxOS2 is a port of wxWidgets for the IBM OS/2 Warp3 and Warp4 platforms.
|
||||
This port is currently under construction and in beta phase.
|
||||
|
||||
For more info about OS2 see:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_port_wxx11 wxX11
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_port_wxx11 wxX11
|
||||
|
||||
@htmlonly
|
||||
<img src="x11_logo.png" alt="X.org logo" title="X.org logo" class="logo">
|
||||
|
|
@ -145,21 +145,21 @@
|
|||
as those running on systems with few resources (PDAs) or for
|
||||
applications which need to use a special themed look. You will need
|
||||
wxWidgets 2.3.2 or higher.
|
||||
|
||||
In order to configure wxWidgets to compile wxX11 you will
|
||||
|
||||
In order to configure wxWidgets to compile wxX11 you will
|
||||
need to type:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@verbatim configure --with-x11 --with-universal @endverbatim
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
For further information, please see the files in docs/x11
|
||||
in the distribution. There is also a page on the use of
|
||||
wxWidgets for embedded applications on the wxWidgets web site.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_port_wxmsw wxMSW
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_port_wxmsw wxMSW
|
||||
|
||||
@htmlonly
|
||||
<img src="win_logo.png" alt="Windows logo" title="Windows logo" class="logo">
|
||||
|
|
@ -174,35 +174,35 @@
|
|||
including MS VC++, Borland 5.5, MinGW32, Cygwin and
|
||||
Watcom as well as cross-compilation with a Linux hosted
|
||||
MinGW32 tool chain.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
For further information, please see the files in docs/msw
|
||||
in the distribution.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_port_wxmsw_themedborders Themed borders on Windows
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Starting with wxWidgets 2.8.5, you can specify the wxBORDER_THEME style to have wxWidgets
|
||||
use a themed border. Using the default XP theme, this is a thin 1-pixel blue border,
|
||||
with an extra 1-pixel border in the window client background colour (usually white) to
|
||||
separate the client area's scrollbars from the border.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
If you don't specify a border style for a wxTextCtrl in rich edit mode, wxWidgets now gives
|
||||
the control themed borders automatically, where previously they would take the Windows 95-style
|
||||
sunken border. Other native controls such as wxTextCtrl in non-rich edit mode, and wxComboBox,
|
||||
already paint themed borders where appropriate. To use themed borders on other windows, such
|
||||
as wxPanel, pass the wxBORDER_THEME style, or (apart from wxPanel) pass no border style.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
In general, specifying wxBORDER_THEME will cause a border of some kind to be used, chosen by the platform
|
||||
and control class. To leave the border decision entirely to wxWidgets, pass wxBORDER_DEFAULT.
|
||||
This is not to be confused with specifying wxBORDER_NONE, which says that there should
|
||||
definitely be @e no border.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsubsection page_port_wxmsw_themedborders_details More detail on border implementation
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The way that wxMSW decides whether to apply a themed border is as follows.
|
||||
The theming code calls wxWindow::GetBorder() to obtain a border. If no border style has been
|
||||
passed to the window constructor, GetBorder() calls GetDefaultBorder() for this window.
|
||||
If wxBORDER_THEME was passed to the window constructor, GetBorder() calls GetDefaultBorderForControl().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The implementation of wxWindow::GetDefaultBorder() on wxMSW calls wxWindow::CanApplyThemeBorder()
|
||||
which is a virtual function that tells wxWidgets whether a control can have a theme
|
||||
applied explicitly (some native controls already paint a theme in which case we should not
|
||||
|
|
@ -210,47 +210,47 @@
|
|||
we wish to create a window with no border (for example, notebook pages). So wxPanel
|
||||
overrides GetDefaultBorder() in order to call the generic wxWindowBase::GetDefaultBorder(),
|
||||
returning wxBORDER_NONE.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_port_wxmsw_wince wxWinCE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxWinCE is the name given to wxMSW when compiled on Windows CE devices;
|
||||
most of wxMSW is common to Win32 and Windows CE but there are
|
||||
some simplifications, enhancements, and differences in
|
||||
behaviour.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
For building instructions, see docs/msw/wince in the
|
||||
distribution, also the section about Visual Studio 2005 project
|
||||
files below. The rest of this section documents issues you
|
||||
need to be aware of when programming for Windows CE devices.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsubsection page_port_wxmsw_wince_ General issues for wxWinCE programming
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Mobile applications generally have fewer features and
|
||||
simpler user interfaces. Simply omit whole sizers, static
|
||||
lines and controls in your dialogs, and use comboboxes instead
|
||||
of listboxes where appropriate. You also need to reduce
|
||||
the amount of spacing used by sizers, for which you can
|
||||
use a macro such as this:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@verbatim
|
||||
#if defined(__WXWINCE__)
|
||||
#define wxLARGESMALL(large,small) small
|
||||
#else
|
||||
#define wxLARGESMALL(large,small) large
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
// Usage
|
||||
topsizer->Add( CreateTextSizer( message ), 0, wxALL, wxLARGESMALL(10,0) );
|
||||
@endverbatim
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
There is only ever one instance of a Windows CE application running,
|
||||
and wxWidgets will take care of showing the current instance and
|
||||
shutting down the second instance if necessary.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
You can test the return value of wxSystemSettings::GetScreenType()
|
||||
for a qualitative assessment of what kind of display is available,
|
||||
or use wxGetDisplaySize() if you need more information.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
You can also use wxGetOsVersion to test for a version of Windows CE at
|
||||
run-time (see the next section). However, because different builds
|
||||
are currently required to target different kinds of device, these
|
||||
|
|
@ -259,19 +259,19 @@
|
|||
platforms. This would require a different approach to the way
|
||||
wxWidgets adapts its behaviour (such as for menubars) to suit the
|
||||
style of device.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
See the "Life!" example (demos/life) for an example of
|
||||
an application that has been tailored for PocketPC and Smartphone use.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@note don't forget to have this line in your .rc file, as for
|
||||
desktop Windows applications:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@verbatim #include "wx/msw/wx.rc" @endverbatim
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsubsection page_port_wxmsw_wince_sdk Testing for WinCE SDKs
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Use these preprocessor symbols to test for the different types of device or SDK:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@li @b __SMARTPHONE__ Generic mobile devices with phone buttons and a small display
|
||||
@li @b __PDA__ Generic mobile devices with no phone
|
||||
@li @b __HANDHELDPC__ Generic mobile device with a keyboard
|
||||
|
|
@ -280,58 +280,58 @@
|
|||
@li @b __POCKETPC__ Microsoft-powered PocketPC devices with touch-screen
|
||||
@li @b __WINCE_STANDARDSDK__ Microsoft-powered Windows CE devices, for generic Windows CE applications
|
||||
@li @b __WINCE_NET__ Microsoft-powered Windows CE .NET devices (_WIN32_WCE is 400 or greater)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxGetOsVersion will return these values:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@li @b wxWINDOWS_POCKETPC The application is running under PocketPC.
|
||||
@li @b wxWINDOWS_SMARTPHONE The application is running under Smartphone.
|
||||
@li @b wxWINDOWS_CE The application is running under Windows CE (built with the Standard SDK).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsubsection page_port_wxmsw_wince_sizing Window sizing in wxWinCE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Top level windows (dialogs, frames) are created always full-screen. Fit() of sizers will not rescale top
|
||||
level windows but instead will scale window content.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
If the screen orientation changes, the windows will automatically be resized
|
||||
so no further action needs to be taken (unless you want to change the layout
|
||||
according to the orientation, which you could detect in idle time, for example).
|
||||
When input panel (SIP) is shown, top level windows (frames and dialogs) resize
|
||||
accordingly (see wxTopLevelWindow::HandleSettingChange).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsubsection page_port_wxmsw_wince_toplevel Closing top-level windows in wxWinCE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
You won't get a wxCloseEvent when the user clicks on the X in the titlebar
|
||||
on Smartphone and PocketPC; the window is simply hidden instead. However the system may send the
|
||||
event to force the application to close down.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsubsection page_port_wxmsw_wince_hibernation Hibernation in wxWinCE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Smartphone and PocketPC will send a wxEVT_HIBERNATE to the application object in low
|
||||
memory conditions. Your application should release memory and close dialogs,
|
||||
and wake up again when the next wxEVT_ACTIVATE or wxEVT_ACTIVATE_APP message is received.
|
||||
(wxEVT_ACTIVATE_APP is generated whenever a wxEVT_ACTIVATE event is received
|
||||
in Smartphone and PocketPC, since these platforms do not support WM_ACTIVATEAPP.)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsubsection page_port_wxmsw_wince_hwbutt Hardware buttons in wxWinCE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Special hardware buttons are sent to a window via the wxEVT_HOTKEY event
|
||||
under Smartphone and PocketPC. You should first register each required button with
|
||||
under Smartphone and PocketPC. You should first register each required button with
|
||||
wxWindow::RegisterHotKey, and unregister the button when you're done with it. For example:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@verbatim
|
||||
win->RegisterHotKey(0, wxMOD_WIN, WXK_SPECIAL1);
|
||||
win->UnregisterHotKey(0);
|
||||
@endverbatim
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
You may have to register the buttons in a wxEVT_ACTIVATE event handler
|
||||
since other applications will grab the buttons.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
There is currently no method of finding out the names of the special
|
||||
buttons or how many there are.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsubsection page_port_wxmsw_wince_dialogs Dialogs in wxWinCE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
PocketPC dialogs have an OK button on the caption, and so you should generally
|
||||
not repeat an OK button on the dialog. You can add a Cancel button if necessary, but some dialogs
|
||||
simply don't offer you the choice (the guidelines recommend you offer an Undo facility
|
||||
|
|
@ -339,11 +339,11 @@
|
|||
a wxID_OK event by default. If you wish to change this, call wxDialog::SetAffirmativeId
|
||||
with the required identifier to be used. Or, override wxDialog::DoOK (return @false to
|
||||
have wxWidgets simply call Close to dismiss the dialog).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Smartphone dialogs do @e not have an OK button on the caption, and are closed
|
||||
using one of the two menu buttons. You need to assign these using wxTopLevelWindow::SetLeftMenu
|
||||
and wxTopLevelWindow::SetRightMenu, for example:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@verbatim
|
||||
#ifdef __SMARTPHONE__
|
||||
SetLeftMenu(wxID_OK);
|
||||
|
|
@ -354,30 +354,30 @@
|
|||
topsizer->Add( CreateButtonSizer( wxOK|wxCANCEL ), 0, wxEXPAND | wxALL, 10 );
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
@endverbatim
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
For implementing property sheets (flat tabs), use a wxNotebook with wxNB_FLAT|wxNB_BOTTOM
|
||||
and have the notebook left, top and right sides overlap the dialog by about 3 pixels
|
||||
to eliminate spurious borders. You can do this by using a negative spacing in your
|
||||
sizer Add() call. The cross-platform property sheet dialog wxPropertySheetDialog is
|
||||
provided, to show settings in the correct style on PocketPC and on other platforms.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Notifications (bubble HTML text with optional buttons and links) will also be
|
||||
implemented in the future for PocketPC.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Modeless dialogs probably don't make sense for PocketPC and Smartphone, since
|
||||
frames and dialogs are normally full-screen, and a modeless dialog is normally
|
||||
intended to co-exist with the main application frame.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsubsection page_port_wxmsw_wince_ppc Menubars and toolbars in PocketPC
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
On PocketPC, a frame must always have a menubar, even if it's empty.
|
||||
An empty menubar/toolbar is automatically provided for dialogs, to hide
|
||||
any existing menubar for the duration of the dialog.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Menubars and toolbars are implemented using a combined control,
|
||||
but you can use essentially the usual wxWidgets API; wxWidgets will combine the menubar
|
||||
and toolbar. However, there are some restrictions:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@li You must create the frame's primary toolbar with wxFrame::CreateToolBar,
|
||||
because this uses the special wxToolMenuBar class (derived from wxToolBar)
|
||||
to implement the combined toolbar and menubar. Otherwise, you can create and manage toolbars
|
||||
|
|
@ -391,20 +391,20 @@
|
|||
or with transparency (for example, using XPMs).
|
||||
@li Adding controls to wxToolMenuBar is not supported. However, wxToolBar supports
|
||||
controls.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Unlike in all other ports, a wxDialog has a wxToolBar, automatically created
|
||||
for you. You may either leave it blank, or access it with wxDialog::GetToolBar
|
||||
and add buttons, then calling wxToolBar::Realize. You cannot set or recreate
|
||||
the toolbar.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsubsection page_port_wxmsw_wince_smart Menubars and toolbars in Smartphone
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
On Smartphone, there are only two menu buttons, so a menubar is simulated
|
||||
using a nested menu on the right menu button. Any toolbars are simply ignored on
|
||||
Smartphone.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsubsection page_port_wxmsw_wince_closing Closing windows in wxWinCE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The guidelines state that applications should not have a Quit menu item,
|
||||
since the user should not have to know whether an application is in memory
|
||||
or not. The close button on a window does not call the window's
|
||||
|
|
@ -412,141 +412,141 @@
|
|||
the Ctrl+Q accelerator can be used to quit the application, so wxWidgets
|
||||
defines this accelerator by default and if your application handles
|
||||
wxID_EXIT, it will do the right thing.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsubsection page_port_wxmsw_wince_ctx Context menus in wxWinCE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
To enable context menus in PocketPC, you currently need to call wxWindow::EnableContextMenu,
|
||||
a wxWinCE-only function. Otherwise the context menu event (wxContextMenuEvent) will
|
||||
never be sent. This API is subject to change.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Context menus are not supported in Smartphone.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsubsection page_port_wxmsw_wince_ctrl Control differences on wxWinCE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
These controls and styles are specific to wxWinCE:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@li wxTextCtrl The wxTE_CAPITALIZE style causes a CAPEDIT control to
|
||||
be created, which capitalizes the first letter.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
These controls are missing from wxWinCE:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@li MDI classes MDI is not supported under Windows CE.
|
||||
@li wxMiniFrame Not supported under Windows CE.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Tooltips are not currently supported for controls, since on PocketPC controls with
|
||||
tooltips are distinct controls, and it will be hard to add dynamic
|
||||
tooltip support.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Control borders on PocketPC and Smartphone should normally be specified with
|
||||
wxBORDER_SIMPLE instead of wxBORDER_SUNKEN. Controls will usually adapt
|
||||
appropriately by virtue of their GetDefaultBorder() function, but if you
|
||||
wish to specify a style explicitly you can use wxDEFAULT_CONTROL_BORDER
|
||||
which will give a simple border on PocketPC and Smartphone, and the sunken border on
|
||||
other platforms.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsubsection page_port_wxmsw_wince_help Online help in wxWinCE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
You can use the help controller wxWinceHelpController which controls
|
||||
simple @c .htm files, usually installed in the Windows directory.
|
||||
See the Windows CE reference for how to format the HTML files.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsubsection page_port_wxmsw_wince_install Installing your PocketPC and Smartphone applications
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
To install your application, you need to build a CAB file using
|
||||
the parameters defined in a special .inf file. The CabWiz program
|
||||
in your SDK will compile the CAB file from the .inf file and
|
||||
files that it specifies.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
For delivery, you can simply ask the user to copy the CAB file to the
|
||||
device and execute the CAB file using File Explorer. Or, you can
|
||||
write a program for the desktop PC that will find the ActiveSync
|
||||
Application Manager and install the CAB file on the device,
|
||||
which is obviously much easier for the user.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Here are some links that may help.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@li A setup builder that takes CABs and builds a setup program is at
|
||||
http://www.eskimo.com/~scottlu/win/index.html.
|
||||
@li Sample installation files can be found in
|
||||
@li Sample installation files can be found in
|
||||
<tt>Windows CE Tools/wce420/POCKET PC 2003/Samples/Win32/AppInst</tt>.
|
||||
@li An installer generator using wxPython can be found at
|
||||
@li An installer generator using wxPython can be found at
|
||||
http://ppcquicksoft.iespana.es/ppcquicksoft/myinstall.html.
|
||||
@li Miscellaneous Windows CE resources can be found at
|
||||
@li Miscellaneous Windows CE resources can be found at
|
||||
http://www.orbworks.com/pcce/resources.html.
|
||||
@li Installer creation instructions with a setup.exe for installing to PPC can be found at
|
||||
@li Installer creation instructions with a setup.exe for installing to PPC can be found at
|
||||
http://www.pocketpcdn.com/articles/creatingsetup.html.
|
||||
@li Microsoft instructions are at
|
||||
@li Microsoft instructions are at
|
||||
http://msdn.microsoft.com/library/default.asp?url=/library/en-us/dnce30/html/appinstall30.asp?frame=true
|
||||
@li Troubleshooting WinCE application installations:
|
||||
@li Troubleshooting WinCE application installations:
|
||||
http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=KB;en-us;q181007
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
You may also check out <tt>demos/life/setup/wince</tt> which contains
|
||||
scripts to create a PocketPC installation for ARM-based
|
||||
devices. In particular, @c build.bat builds the distribution and
|
||||
copies it to a directory called @c Deliver.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsubsection page_port_wxmsw_wince_filedlg wxFileDialog in PocketPC
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Allowing the user to access files on memory cards, or on arbitrary
|
||||
parts of the filesystem, is a pain; the standard file dialog only
|
||||
shows folders under My Documents or folders on memory cards
|
||||
(not the system or card root directory, for example). This is
|
||||
a known problem for PocketPC developers.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
If you need a file dialog that allows access to all folders,
|
||||
you can use wxGenericFileDialog instead. You will need to include
|
||||
you can use wxGenericFileDialog instead. You will need to include
|
||||
@c wx/generic/filedlgg.h.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsubsection page_port_wxmsw_wince_evc Embedded Visual C++ Issues
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<b>Run-time type information</b>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
If you wish to use runtime type information (RTTI) with eVC++ 4, you need to download
|
||||
an extra library, @c ccrtrtti.lib, and link with it. At the time of
|
||||
writing you can get it from here:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@verbatim
|
||||
http://support.microsoft.com/kb/830482/en-us
|
||||
@endverbatim
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Otherwise you will get linker errors similar to this:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@verbatim
|
||||
wxwince26d.lib(control.obj) : error LNK2001: unresolved external symbol "const type_info::`vftable'" (??_7type_info@@6B@)
|
||||
@endverbatim
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<b>Windows Mobile 5.0 emulator</b>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Note that there is no separate emulator configuration for Windows Mobile 5.0: the
|
||||
emulator runs the ARM code directly.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<b>Visual Studio 2005 project files</b>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Unfortunately, Visual Studio 2005, required to build Windows Mobile 5.0 applications,
|
||||
doesn't do a perfect job of converting the project files from eVC++ format.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
When you have converted the wxWidgets workspace, edit the configuration properties
|
||||
for each configuration and in the Librarian, add a relative path ..\\..\\lib to
|
||||
each library path. For example:
|
||||
each library path. For example:
|
||||
<tt>..\\$(PlatformName)\\$(ConfigurationName)\\wx_mono.lib</tt>.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Then, for a sample you want to compile, edit the configuration properties
|
||||
and make sure
|
||||
<tt>..\\..\\lib\\$(PlatformName)\\$(ConfigurationName)</tt>
|
||||
is in the Linker/General/Additional Library Directories property.
|
||||
Also change the Linker/Input/Additional Dependencies property to something like
|
||||
<tt>coredll.lib wx_mono.lib wx_wxjpeg.lib wx_wxpng.lib wx_wxzlib.lib wx_wxexpat.lib
|
||||
and make sure
|
||||
<tt>..\\..\\lib\\$(PlatformName)\\$(ConfigurationName)</tt>
|
||||
is in the Linker/General/Additional Library Directories property.
|
||||
Also change the Linker/Input/Additional Dependencies property to something like
|
||||
<tt>coredll.lib wx_mono.lib wx_wxjpeg.lib wx_wxpng.lib wx_wxzlib.lib wx_wxexpat.lib
|
||||
commctrl.lib winsock.lib wininet.lib</tt>
|
||||
(since the library names in the wxWidgets workspace were changed by VS 2005).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Alternately, you could could edit all the names to be identical to the original eVC++
|
||||
names, but this will probably be more fiddly.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsubsection page_port_wxmsw_wince_issues Remaining issues
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
These are some of the remaining problems to be sorted out, and features
|
||||
to be supported.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@li <b>Windows Mobile 5 issues.</b> It is not possible to get the HMENU for
|
||||
the command bar on Mobile 5, so the menubar functions need to be rewritten
|
||||
to get the individual menus without use of a menubar handle. Also the
|
||||
|
|
@ -567,15 +567,15 @@
|
|||
missing styles are implemented with WM_PAINT.
|
||||
@li <b>HTML control.</b> PocketPC has its own HTML control which can be used for showing
|
||||
local pages or navigating the web. We should create a version of wxHtmlWindow that uses this
|
||||
control, or have a separately-named control (wxHtmlCtrl), with a syntax as close as possible
|
||||
control, or have a separately-named control (wxHtmlCtrl), with a syntax as close as possible
|
||||
to wxHtmlWindow.
|
||||
@li <b>Tooltip control.</b> PocketPC uses special TTBUTTON and TTSTATIC controls for adding
|
||||
tooltips, with the tooltip separated from the label with a double tilde. We need to support
|
||||
this using SetToolTip.(Unfortunately it does not seem possible to dynamically remove the tooltip,
|
||||
tooltips, with the tooltip separated from the label with a double tilde. We need to support
|
||||
this using SetToolTip.(Unfortunately it does not seem possible to dynamically remove the tooltip,
|
||||
so an extra style may be required.)
|
||||
@li <b>Focus.</b> In the wxPropertySheetDialog demo on Smartphone, it's not possible to navigate
|
||||
between controls. The focus handling in wxWidgets needs investigation. See in particular
|
||||
src/common/containr.cpp, and note that the default OnActivate handler in src/msw/toplevel.cpp
|
||||
between controls. The focus handling in wxWidgets needs investigation. See in particular
|
||||
src/common/containr.cpp, and note that the default OnActivate handler in src/msw/toplevel.cpp
|
||||
sets the focus to the first child of the dialog.
|
||||
@li <b>OK button.</b> We should allow the OK button on a dialog to be optional, perhaps
|
||||
by using wxCLOSE_BOX to indicate when the OK button should be displayed.
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -117,7 +117,7 @@
|
|||
specific information about the problem will be logged.
|
||||
|
||||
You should also use @ref page_macro_cat_debugging as part of a `defensive programming' strategy,
|
||||
scattering wxASSERTs liberally to test for problems in your code as early as possible.
|
||||
scattering wxASSERTs liberally to test for problems in your code as early as possible.
|
||||
Forward thinking will save a surprising amount of time in the long run.
|
||||
|
||||
See the @ref overview_debugging for further information.
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -36,10 +36,10 @@
|
|||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_utils_tex2rtf Tex2RTF
|
||||
|
||||
Supplied with wxWidgets is a utility called Tex2RTF for
|
||||
Supplied with wxWidgets is a utility called Tex2RTF for
|
||||
converting @e LaTeX manuals HTML, MS HTML Help, wxHTML Help, RTF, and Windows
|
||||
Help RTF formats. Tex2RTF was used for the wxWidgets manuals and can be used
|
||||
independently by authors wishing to create on-line and printed manuals from the
|
||||
Help RTF formats. Tex2RTF was used for the wxWidgets manuals and can be used
|
||||
independently by authors wishing to create on-line and printed manuals from the
|
||||
same @e LaTeX source. Please see the separate documentation for Tex2RTF.
|
||||
You can find it under @c utils/tex2rtf.
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -60,7 +60,7 @@
|
|||
|
||||
|
||||
@section page_utils_samples Samples
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Probably the best way to learn wxWidgets is by reading the source of some 50+
|
||||
samples provided with it. Many aspects of wxWidgets programming can be learnt
|
||||
from them, but sometimes it is not simple to just choose the right sample to
|
||||
|
|
@ -68,82 +68,82 @@
|
|||
make it easier to find the relevant one if a simple grep through all sources
|
||||
didn't help. They also provide some notes about using the samples and what
|
||||
features of wxWidgets are they supposed to test.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
There are currently more than 50 different samples as part of wxWidgets and
|
||||
this list is not complete. You should start your tour of wxWidgets with the
|
||||
minimal sample which is the wxWidgets version of
|
||||
"Hello, world!". It shows the basic structure of wxWidgets program and is the
|
||||
most commented sample of all - looking at its source code is recommended.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The next most useful samples are probably widgets
|
||||
and controls which show many of wxWidgets native and
|
||||
generic controls, such as buttons, listboxes, checkboxes, comboboxes etc.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Other, more complicated controls, have their own samples. In this category you
|
||||
may find the following samples showing the corresponding controls:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@li wxCalendarCtrl: @ref page_utils_samples_calendar
|
||||
@li wxListCtrl: @ref page_utils_samples_listctrl
|
||||
@li wxTreeCtrl: @ref page_utils_samples_treectrl
|
||||
@li wxGrid: @ref page_utils_samples_grid
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Finally, it might be helpful to do a search in the entire sample directory if
|
||||
you can't find the sample showing the control you are interested in by
|
||||
name. Most classes contained in wxWidgets occur in at least one of the samples.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_minimal Minimal sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The minimal sample is what most people will know under the term Hello World,
|
||||
i.e. a minimal program that doesn't demonstrate anything apart from what is
|
||||
needed to write a program that will display a "hello" dialog. This is usually
|
||||
a good starting point for learning how to use wxWidgets.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_animate Animate sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The @c animate sample shows how you can use wxAnimationCtrl
|
||||
control and shows concept of a platform-dependent animation encapsulated
|
||||
in wxAnimation.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_artprovider Art provider sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The @c artprov sample shows how you can customize the look of standard
|
||||
wxWidgets dialogs by replacing default bitmaps/icons with your own versions.
|
||||
It also shows how you can use wxArtProvider to
|
||||
get stock bitmaps for use in your application.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_calendar Calendar sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This font shows the calendar control in action. It
|
||||
shows how to configure the control (see the different options in the calendar
|
||||
menu) and also how to process the notifications from it.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_config Config sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This sample demonstrates the wxConfig classes in a platform
|
||||
independent way, i.e. it uses text based files to store a given configuration under
|
||||
Unix and uses the Registry under Windows.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
See @ref overview_config for the descriptions of all features of this class.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_controls Controls sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The controls sample is the main test program for most simple controls used in
|
||||
wxWidgets. The sample tests their basic functionality, events, placement,
|
||||
modification in terms of colour and font as well as the possibility to change
|
||||
the controls programmatically, such as adding an item to a list box etc. Apart
|
||||
from that, the sample uses a wxNotebook and tests most
|
||||
features of this special control (using bitmap in the tabs, using
|
||||
wxSizer instances and wxLayoutConstraints within notebook pages, advancing pages
|
||||
wxSizer instances and wxLayoutConstraints within notebook pages, advancing pages
|
||||
programmatically and vetoing a page change by intercepting the wxNotebookEvent.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The various controls tested are listed here:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@li wxButton
|
||||
@li wxBitmapButton
|
||||
@li wxCheckBox
|
||||
|
|
@ -159,10 +159,10 @@
|
|||
@li wxRadioBox
|
||||
@li wxRadioButton
|
||||
@li wxSlider
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_debugrpt DebugRpt sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This sample shows how to use wxDebugReport class to
|
||||
generate a debug report in case of a program crash or otherwise. On start up,
|
||||
it proposes to either crash itself (by dereferencing a NULL pointer) or
|
||||
|
|
@ -170,54 +170,54 @@
|
|||
with standard information adding a custom file to it (just a timestamp) and
|
||||
allows to view the information gathered using
|
||||
wxDebugReportPreview.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
For the report processing part of the sample to work you should make available
|
||||
a Web server accepting form uploads, otherwise
|
||||
wxDebugReportUpload will report an error.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_dialogs Dialogs sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This sample shows how to use the common dialogs available from wxWidgets. These
|
||||
dialogs are described in detail in the @ref overview_cmndlg.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_dialup Dialup sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This sample shows the wxDialUpManager
|
||||
class. In the status bar, it displays the information gathered through its
|
||||
interface: in particular, the current connection status (online or offline) and
|
||||
whether the connection is permanent (in which case a string `LAN' appears in
|
||||
the third status bar field - but note that you may be on a LAN not
|
||||
connected to the Internet, in which case you will not see this) or not.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Using the menu entries, you may also dial or hang up the line if you have a
|
||||
modem attached and (this only makes sense for Windows) list the available
|
||||
connections.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_dnd DnD sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This sample shows both clipboard and drag and drop in action. It is quite non
|
||||
trivial and may be safely used as a basis for implementing the clipboard and
|
||||
drag and drop operations in a real-life program.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
When you run the sample, its screen is split in several parts. On the top,
|
||||
there are two listboxes which show the standard derivations of
|
||||
wxDropTarget:
|
||||
wxTextDropTarget and
|
||||
wxFileDropTarget.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The middle of the sample window is taken by the log window which shows what is
|
||||
going on (of course, this only works in debug builds) and may be helpful to see
|
||||
the sequence of steps of data transfer.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Finally, the last part is used for dragging text from it to either one of the
|
||||
listboxes (only one will accept it) or another application. The last
|
||||
functionality available from the main frame is to paste a bitmap from the
|
||||
clipboard (or, in the case of the Windows version, also a metafile) - it will be
|
||||
shown in a new frame.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
So far, everything we mentioned was implemented with minimal amount of code
|
||||
using standard wxWidgets classes. The more advanced features are demonstrated
|
||||
if you create a shape frame from the main frame menu. A shape is a geometric
|
||||
|
|
@ -230,93 +230,93 @@
|
|||
bitmaps which allows them to be pasted/dropped in many other applications
|
||||
(and, under Windows, also as metafiles which are supported by most of Windows
|
||||
programs as well - try Write/Wordpad, for example).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Take a look at DnDShapeDataObject class to see how you may use
|
||||
wxDataObject to achieve this.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_event Event sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The event sample demonstrates various features of the wxWidgets events. It
|
||||
shows using dynamic events and connecting/disconnecting the event handlers
|
||||
during run time and also using
|
||||
PushEventHandler() and
|
||||
PopEventHandler().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_except Except(ions) sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This very simple sample shows how to use C++ exceptions in wxWidgets programs,
|
||||
i.e. where to catch the exception which may be thrown by the program code. It
|
||||
doesn't do anything very exciting by itself, you need to study its code to
|
||||
understand what goes on.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
You need to build the library with @c wxUSE_EXCEPTIONS being set to @c 1
|
||||
and compile your code with C++ exceptions support to be able to build this
|
||||
sample.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_exec Exec sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The exec sample demonstrates the wxExecute and
|
||||
wxShell functions. Both of them are used to execute the
|
||||
external programs and the sample shows how to do this synchronously (waiting
|
||||
until the program terminates) or asynchronously (notification will come later).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
It also shows how to capture the output of the child process in both
|
||||
synchronous and asynchronous cases and how to kill the processes with
|
||||
wxProcess::Kill and test for their existence with
|
||||
wxProcess::Exists.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_font Font sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The font sample demonstrates wxFont,
|
||||
wxFontEnumerator and
|
||||
wxFontMapper classes. It allows you to see the fonts
|
||||
available (to wxWidgets) on the computer and shows all characters of the
|
||||
chosen font as well.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_grid Grid sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
TODO.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_html HTML samples
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Eight HTML samples (you can find them in directory @c samples/html)
|
||||
cover all features of the HTML sub-library.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@li @b Test demonstrates how to create wxHtmlWindow
|
||||
and also shows most supported HTML tags.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@li @b Widget shows how you can embed ordinary controls or windows within an
|
||||
HTML page. It also nicely explains how to write new tag handlers and extend
|
||||
the library to work with unsupported tags.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@li @b About may give you an idea how to write good-looking About boxes.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@li @b Zip demonstrates use of virtual file systems in wxHTML. The zip archives
|
||||
handler (ships with wxWidgets) allows you to access HTML pages stored
|
||||
in a compressed archive as if they were ordinary files.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@li @b Virtual is yet another virtual file systems demo. This one generates pages at run-time.
|
||||
You may find it useful if you need to display some reports in your application.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@li @b Printing explains use of wxHtmlEasyPrinting
|
||||
class which serves as as-simple-as-possible interface for printing HTML
|
||||
documents without much work. In fact, only few function calls are sufficient.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@li @b Help and @b Helpview are variations on displaying HTML help
|
||||
(compatible with MS HTML Help Workshop). @e Help shows how to embed
|
||||
wxHtmlHelpController in your application
|
||||
while @e Helpview is a simple tool that only pops up the help window and
|
||||
displays help books given at command line.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_image Image sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The image sample demonstrates use of the wxImage class
|
||||
and shows how to download images in a variety of formats, currently PNG, GIF,
|
||||
TIFF, JPEG, BMP, PNM and PCX. The top of the sample shows two rectangles, one
|
||||
|
|
@ -324,7 +324,7 @@
|
|||
wxBitmap, converted to a wxImage, saved as a PNG image
|
||||
and then reloaded from the PNG file again so that conversions between wxImage
|
||||
and wxBitmap as well as loading and saving PNG files are tested.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
At the bottom of the main frame there is a test for using a monochrome bitmap by
|
||||
drawing into a wxMemoryDC. The bitmap is then drawn
|
||||
specifying the foreground and background colours with
|
||||
|
|
@ -332,25 +332,25 @@
|
|||
wxDC::SetTextBackground (on the left). The
|
||||
bitmap is then converted to a wxImage and the foreground colour (black) is
|
||||
replaced with red using wxImage::Replace.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This sample also contains the code for testing the image rotation and resizing
|
||||
and using raw bitmap access, see the corresponding menu commands.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_internat Internat(ionalization) sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The not very clearly named internat sample demonstrates the wxWidgets
|
||||
internationalization (i18n for short from now on) features. To be more
|
||||
precise, it only shows localization support, i.e. support for translating the
|
||||
program messages into another language while true i18n would also involve
|
||||
changing the other aspects of the programs behaviour.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
More information about this sample can be found in the @c readme.txt file in
|
||||
its directory. Please also see the @ref overview_i18n.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_layout Layout sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The layout sample demonstrates the two different layout systems offered
|
||||
by wxWidgets. When starting the program, you will see a frame with some
|
||||
controls and some graphics. The controls will change their size whenever
|
||||
|
|
@ -359,70 +359,70 @@
|
|||
class. See also the overview and the
|
||||
wxIndividualLayoutConstraint
|
||||
class for further information.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The menu in this sample offers two more tests, one showing how to use
|
||||
a wxBoxSizer in a simple dialog and the other one
|
||||
showing how to use sizers in connection with a wxNotebook
|
||||
class. See also wxSizer.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_listctrl Listctrl sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This sample shows the wxListCtrl control. Different modes
|
||||
supported by the control (list, icons, small icons, report) may be chosen from
|
||||
the menu.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The sample also provides some timings for adding/deleting/sorting a lot of
|
||||
(several thousands) items into the control.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_mediaplayer Mediaplayer sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This sample demonstrates how to use all the features of
|
||||
wxMediaCtrl and play various types of sound, video,
|
||||
and other files.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
It replaces the old dynamic sample.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_notebook Notebook sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This samples shows wxBookCtrl family of controls.
|
||||
Although initially it was written to demonstrate wxNotebook
|
||||
only, it can now be also used to see wxListbook,
|
||||
wxChoicebook and wxTreebook in action.
|
||||
Test each of the controls, their orientation, images and pages using
|
||||
Test each of the controls, their orientation, images and pages using
|
||||
commands through menu.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_render Render sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This sample shows how to replace the default wxWidgets
|
||||
renderer and also how to write a shared library
|
||||
(DLL) implementing a renderer and load and unload it during the run-time.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_scrollsub Scroll subwindow sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This sample demonstrates use of the wxScrolledWindow
|
||||
class including placing subwindows into it and drawing simple graphics. It uses the
|
||||
SetTargetWindow method and thus the effect
|
||||
of scrolling does not show in the scrolled window itself, but in one of its subwindows.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Additionally, this samples demonstrates how to optimize drawing operations in wxWidgets,
|
||||
in particular using the wxWindow::IsExposed method with
|
||||
the aim to prevent unnecessary drawing in the window and thus reducing or removing
|
||||
flicker on screen.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_sockets Sockets sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The sockets sample demonstrates how to use the communication facilities
|
||||
provided by wxSocket. There are two different
|
||||
applications in this sample: a server, which is implemented using a
|
||||
wxSocketServer object, and a client, which
|
||||
is implemented as a wxSocketClient.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The server binds to the local address, using TCP port number 3000,
|
||||
sets up an event handler to be notified of incoming connection requests
|
||||
(@b wxSOCKET_CONNECTION events), and sits there, waiting for clients
|
||||
|
|
@ -435,13 +435,13 @@
|
|||
handler is the same for all connections; to find out which socket the
|
||||
event is addressed to, the GetSocket function
|
||||
is used.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Although it might take some time to get used to the event-oriented
|
||||
system upon which wxSocket is built, the benefits are many. See, for
|
||||
example, that the server application, while being single-threaded
|
||||
(and of course without using fork() or ugly select() loops) can handle
|
||||
an arbitrary number of connections.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The client starts up unconnected, so you can use the Connect... option
|
||||
to specify the address of the server you are going to connect to (the
|
||||
TCP port number is hard-coded as 3000). Once connected, a number of
|
||||
|
|
@ -454,70 +454,70 @@
|
|||
both clients and connection objects in the server set up an event handler
|
||||
to catch @b wxSOCKET_LOST events, each one is immediately notified
|
||||
if the other end closes the connection.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
There is also a URL test which shows how to use
|
||||
the wxURL class to fetch data from a given URL.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The sockets sample is work in progress. Some things to do:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@li More tests for basic socket functionality.
|
||||
@li More tests for protocol classes (wxProtocol and its descendants).
|
||||
@li Tests for the recently added (and still in alpha stage) datagram sockets.
|
||||
@li New samples which actually do something useful (suggestions accepted).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_sound Sound sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The @c sound sample shows how to use wxSound for simple
|
||||
audio output (e.g. notifications).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_statbar Statbar sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This sample shows how to create and use wxStatusBar. Although most of the
|
||||
samples have a statusbar, they usually only create a default one and only
|
||||
do it once.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Here you can see how to recreate the statusbar (with possibly different number
|
||||
of fields) and how to use it to show icons/bitmaps and/or put arbitrary
|
||||
controls into it.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_taborder Tab order sample
|
||||
|
||||
This sample allows to test keyboard navigation (mostly done using the
|
||||
|
||||
This sample allows to test keyboard navigation (mostly done using the
|
||||
@c TAB key, hence the sample name) between different controls.
|
||||
It shows the use of wxWindow::MoveBeforeInTabOrder() and
|
||||
It shows the use of wxWindow::MoveBeforeInTabOrder() and
|
||||
MoveAfterInTabOrder() methods to change
|
||||
the default order of the windows in the navigation chain and of
|
||||
the default order of the windows in the navigation chain and of
|
||||
wxWindow::Navigate() for moving focus along this
|
||||
chain.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_text Text sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This sample demonstrates four features: firstly the use and many variants of
|
||||
the wxTextCtrl class (single line, multi line, read only,
|
||||
password, ignoring TAB, ignoring ENTER).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Secondly it shows how to intercept a wxKeyEvent in both
|
||||
the raw form using the @c EVT_KEY_UP and @c EVT_KEY_DOWN macros and the
|
||||
higher level from using the @c EVT_CHAR macro. All characters will be logged
|
||||
in a log window at the bottom of the main window. By pressing some of the function
|
||||
keys, you can test some actions in the text ctrl as well as get statistics on the
|
||||
text ctrls, which is useful for testing if these statistics actually are correct.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Thirdly, on platforms which support it, the sample will offer to copy text to the
|
||||
wxClipboard and to paste text from it. The GTK version will
|
||||
use the so called PRIMARY SELECTION, which is the pseudo clipboard under X and
|
||||
best known from pasting text to the XTerm program.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Last not least: some of the text controls have tooltips and the sample also shows
|
||||
how tooltips can be centrally disabled and their latency controlled.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_thread Thread sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This sample demonstrates use of threads in connection with GUI programs.
|
||||
There are two fundamentally different ways to use threads in GUI programs and
|
||||
either way has to take care of the fact that the GUI library itself usually
|
||||
|
|
@ -527,22 +527,22 @@
|
|||
background. In order to make communication between the main thread and the
|
||||
worker threads possible, wxWidgets offers the wxPostEvent
|
||||
function and this sample makes use of this function.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The other way to use a so called Mutex (such as those offered in the wxMutex
|
||||
class) that prevent threads from accessing the GUI classes as long as any other
|
||||
thread accesses them. For this, wxWidgets has the wxMutexGuiEnter
|
||||
and wxMutexGuiLeave functions, both of which are
|
||||
used and tested in the sample as well.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
See also @ref overview_thread and wxThread.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_toolbar Toolbar sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The toolbar sample shows the wxToolBar class in action.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The following things are demonstrated:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@li Creating the toolbar using wxToolBar::AddTool and wxToolBar::AddControl: see
|
||||
MyApp::InitToolbar in the sample.
|
||||
@li Using @c EVT_UPDATE_UI handler for automatically enabling/disabling
|
||||
|
|
@ -550,46 +550,46 @@
|
|||
in MyFrame::OnUpdateCopyAndCut.
|
||||
@li Using wxToolBar::DeleteTool and wxToolBar::InsertTool to dynamically update the
|
||||
toolbar.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Some buttons in the main toolbar are check buttons, i.e. they stay checked when
|
||||
pressed. On the platforms which support it, the sample also adds a combobox
|
||||
to the toolbar showing how you can use arbitrary controls and not only buttons
|
||||
in it.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
If you toggle another toolbar in the sample (using @c Ctrl-A) you will also
|
||||
see the radio toolbar buttons in action: the first three buttons form a radio
|
||||
group, i.e. checking any of them automatically unchecks the previously
|
||||
checked one.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_treectrl Treectrl sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This sample demonstrates using the wxTreeCtrl class. Here
|
||||
you may see how to process various notification messages sent by this control
|
||||
and also when they occur (by looking at the messages in the text control in
|
||||
the bottom part of the frame).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Adding, inserting and deleting items and branches from the tree as well as
|
||||
sorting (in default alphabetical order as well as in custom one) is
|
||||
demonstrated here as well - try the corresponding menu entries.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_widgets Widgets sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The widgets sample is the main presentation program for most simple and advanced
|
||||
native controls and complex generic widgets provided by wxWidgets.
|
||||
The sample tests their basic functionality, events, placement, modification
|
||||
in terms of colour and font as well as the possibility to change
|
||||
the controls programmatically, such as adding an item to a list box etc.
|
||||
All widgets are categorized for easy browsing.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection page_utils_samples_wizard Wizard sample
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This sample shows the so-called wizard dialog (implemented using
|
||||
wxWizard and related classes). It shows almost all
|
||||
features supported:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@li Using bitmaps with the wizard and changing them depending on the page
|
||||
shown (notice that wxValidationPage in the sample has a different image from
|
||||
the other ones)
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -46,7 +46,7 @@
|
|||
|
||||
@section overview_dataobject_source The data provider (source) duties
|
||||
|
||||
The data provider is responsible for creating a wxDataObject containing the
|
||||
The data provider is responsible for creating a wxDataObject containing the
|
||||
data to be transferred. Then it should either pass it to the clipboard using
|
||||
wxClipboard::SetData function or to wxDropSource and call wxDropSource::DoDragDrop
|
||||
function.
|
||||
|
|
@ -69,12 +69,12 @@
|
|||
@section overview_dataobject_target The data receiver (target) duties
|
||||
|
||||
To receive (paste in usual terminology) data from the clipboard, you should
|
||||
create a wxDataObject derived class which supports the data formats you need
|
||||
create a wxDataObject derived class which supports the data formats you need
|
||||
and pass it as argument to wxClipboard::GetData. If it returns @false,
|
||||
no data in (any of) the supported format(s) is available. If it returns @true,
|
||||
the data has been successfully transferred to wxDataObject.
|
||||
|
||||
For drag and drop case, the wxDropTarget::OnData virtual function will be called
|
||||
For drag and drop case, the wxDropTarget::OnData virtual function will be called
|
||||
when a data object is dropped, from which the data itself may be requested by calling
|
||||
wxDropTarget::GetData method which fills the data object.
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -49,12 +49,12 @@
|
|||
|
||||
@section overview_datetime_classes All date/time classes at a glance
|
||||
|
||||
There are 3 main classes declared in @c wx/datetime.h: except wxDateTime itself
|
||||
There are 3 main classes declared in @c wx/datetime.h: except wxDateTime itself
|
||||
which represents an absolute moment in time, there are also two classes -
|
||||
wxTimeSpan and wxDateSpan - which represent the intervals of time.
|
||||
|
||||
There are also helper classes which are used together with wxDateTime:
|
||||
wxDateTimeHolidayAuthority which is used to determine whether a given date
|
||||
wxDateTimeHolidayAuthority which is used to determine whether a given date
|
||||
is a holiday or not and wxDateTimeWorkDays which is a derivation of this
|
||||
class for which (only) Saturdays and Sundays are the holidays. See more about
|
||||
these classes in the discussion of the holidays (see @ref overview_datetime_holidays).
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -11,16 +11,16 @@
|
|||
@page overview_dc Device Contexts
|
||||
|
||||
Classes: wxBufferedDC, wxBufferedPaintDC, wxDC, wxPostScriptDC,
|
||||
wxMetafileDC, wxMemoryDC, wxPrinterDC, wxScreenDC, wxClientDC,
|
||||
wxMetafileDC, wxMemoryDC, wxPrinterDC, wxScreenDC, wxClientDC,
|
||||
wxPaintDC, wxWindowDC.
|
||||
|
||||
A wxDC is a @e device context onto which graphics and text can be drawn.
|
||||
The device context is intended to represent a number of output devices in a
|
||||
The device context is intended to represent a number of output devices in a
|
||||
generic way, with the same API being used throughout.
|
||||
|
||||
Some device contexts are created temporarily in order to draw on a window.
|
||||
This is @true of wxScreenDC, wxClientDC, wxPaintDC, and wxWindowDC.
|
||||
The following describes the differences between these device contexts and
|
||||
The following describes the differences between these device contexts and
|
||||
when you should use them.
|
||||
|
||||
@li @b wxScreenDC. Use this to paint on the screen, as opposed to an individual window.
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -22,7 +22,7 @@
|
|||
@li @ref overview_debugging_dbgctx
|
||||
@li @ref overview_debugging_dbgmacros
|
||||
@li @ref overview_debugging_logging
|
||||
@li @ref overview_debugging_dbgctx2
|
||||
@li @ref overview_debugging_dbgctx2
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<hr>
|
||||
|
|
@ -31,7 +31,7 @@
|
|||
@section overview_debugging_dbgctx wxDebugContext
|
||||
|
||||
wxDebugContext is a class that never gets instantiated, but ties together
|
||||
various static functions and variables. It allows you to dump all objects to that stream,
|
||||
various static functions and variables. It allows you to dump all objects to that stream,
|
||||
write statistics about object allocation, and check memory for errors.
|
||||
|
||||
It is good practice to define a wxObject::Dump member function for each class you derive
|
||||
|
|
@ -47,9 +47,9 @@
|
|||
and compiler -- some systems don't allow all memory logging to be enabled). See the
|
||||
memcheck sample for example of usage.
|
||||
|
||||
For wxDebugContext to do its work, the @e new and @e delete operators for wxObject
|
||||
have been redefined to store extra information about dynamically allocated objects
|
||||
(but not statically declared objects).
|
||||
For wxDebugContext to do its work, the @e new and @e delete operators for wxObject
|
||||
have been redefined to store extra information about dynamically allocated objects
|
||||
(but not statically declared objects).
|
||||
|
||||
This slows down a debugging version of an application, but can
|
||||
find difficult-to-detect memory leaks (objects are not
|
||||
|
|
@ -64,7 +64,7 @@
|
|||
@endcode
|
||||
|
||||
All occurrences of 'new' in wxWidgets and your own application will use
|
||||
the overridden form of the operator with two extra arguments. This means that
|
||||
the overridden form of the operator with two extra arguments. This means that
|
||||
the debugging output (and error messages reporting memory problems) will tell you what
|
||||
file and on what line you allocated the object. Unfortunately not all
|
||||
compilers allow this definition to work properly, but most do.
|
||||
|
|
@ -98,7 +98,7 @@
|
|||
|
||||
@section overview_debugging_logging Logging functions
|
||||
|
||||
You can use the wxLogDebug and wxLogTrace functions to output debugging information in
|
||||
You can use the wxLogDebug and wxLogTrace functions to output debugging information in
|
||||
debug mode; it will do nothing for non-debugging code.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -37,29 +37,29 @@
|
|||
|
||||
@section overview_dialog_autoscrolling Automatic scrolling dialogs
|
||||
|
||||
As an ever greater variety of mobile hardware comes to market, it becomes more
|
||||
imperative for wxWidgets applications to adapt to these platforms without putting
|
||||
As an ever greater variety of mobile hardware comes to market, it becomes more
|
||||
imperative for wxWidgets applications to adapt to these platforms without putting
|
||||
too much burden on the programmer. One area where wxWidgets can help is in adapting
|
||||
dialogs for the lower resolution screens that inevitably accompany a smaller form factor.
|
||||
wxDialog therefore supplies a global wxDialogLayoutAdapter class that implements
|
||||
wxDialog therefore supplies a global wxDialogLayoutAdapter class that implements
|
||||
automatic scrolling adaptation for most sizer-based custom dialogs.
|
||||
|
||||
Many applications should therefore be able to adapt to small displays with little
|
||||
Many applications should therefore be able to adapt to small displays with little
|
||||
or no work, as far as dialogs are concerned.
|
||||
By default this adaptation is off. To switch scrolling adaptation on globally in
|
||||
By default this adaptation is off. To switch scrolling adaptation on globally in
|
||||
your application, call the static function wxDialog::EnableLayoutAdaptation passing @true.
|
||||
You can also adjust adaptation on a per-dialog basis by calling
|
||||
wxDialog::SetLayoutAdaptationMode with one of @c wxDIALOG_ADAPTATION_MODE_DEFAULT
|
||||
wxDialog::SetLayoutAdaptationMode with one of @c wxDIALOG_ADAPTATION_MODE_DEFAULT
|
||||
(use the global setting), @c wxDIALOG_ADAPTATION_MODE_ENABLED or @c wxDIALOG_ADAPTATION_MODE_DISABLED.
|
||||
|
||||
The last two modes override the global adaptation setting.
|
||||
With adaptation enabled, if the display size is too small for the dialog, wxWidgets (or rather the
|
||||
standard adapter class wxStandardDialogLayoutAdapter) will make part of the dialog scrolling,
|
||||
leaving standard buttons in a non-scrolling part at the bottom of the dialog.
|
||||
This is done as follows, in wxDialogLayoutAdapter::DoLayoutAdaptation called from
|
||||
This is done as follows, in wxDialogLayoutAdapter::DoLayoutAdaptation called from
|
||||
within wxDialog::Show or wxDialog::ShowModal:
|
||||
|
||||
@li If wxDialog::GetContentWindow returns a window derived from wxBookCtrlBase,
|
||||
@li If wxDialog::GetContentWindow returns a window derived from wxBookCtrlBase,
|
||||
the pages are made scrollable and no other adaptation is done.
|
||||
@li wxWidgets looks for a wxStdDialogButtonSizer and uses it for the non-scrolling part.
|
||||
@li If that search failed, wxWidgets looks for a horizontal wxBoxSizer with one or more
|
||||
|
|
@ -67,17 +67,17 @@
|
|||
@li If that search failed too, wxWidgets finds 'loose' standard buttons (in any kind of sizer)
|
||||
and adds them to a wxStdDialogButtonSizer.
|
||||
If no standard buttons were found, the whole dialog content will scroll.
|
||||
@li All the children apart from standard buttons are reparented onto a new wxScrolledWindow
|
||||
object, using the old top-level sizer for the scrolled window and creating a new top-level
|
||||
@li All the children apart from standard buttons are reparented onto a new wxScrolledWindow
|
||||
object, using the old top-level sizer for the scrolled window and creating a new top-level
|
||||
sizer to lay out the scrolled window and standard button sizer.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection overview_dialog_autoscrolling_custom Customising scrolling adaptation
|
||||
|
||||
In addition to switching adaptation on and off globally and per dialog,
|
||||
In addition to switching adaptation on and off globally and per dialog,
|
||||
you can choose how aggressively wxWidgets will search for standard buttons by setting
|
||||
wxDialog::SetLayoutAdaptationLevel. By default, all the steps described above will be
|
||||
performed but by setting the level to 1, for example, you can choose to only look for
|
||||
wxDialog::SetLayoutAdaptationLevel. By default, all the steps described above will be
|
||||
performed but by setting the level to 1, for example, you can choose to only look for
|
||||
wxStdDialogButtonSizer.
|
||||
|
||||
You can use wxDialog::AddMainButtonId to add identifiers for buttons that should also be
|
||||
|
|
@ -88,7 +88,7 @@
|
|||
the functions CanDoLayoutAdaptation and DoLayoutAdaptation to test for adaptation applicability
|
||||
and perform the adaptation.
|
||||
|
||||
You can also override wxDialog::CanDoLayoutAdaptation and wxDialog::DoLayoutAdaptation
|
||||
You can also override wxDialog::CanDoLayoutAdaptation and wxDialog::DoLayoutAdaptation
|
||||
in a class derived from wxDialog.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -100,13 +100,13 @@
|
|||
@li The dialog doesn't use sizers.
|
||||
@li The dialog implementation makes assumptions about the window hierarchy,
|
||||
for example getting the parent of a control and casting to the dialog class.
|
||||
@li The dialog does custom painting and/or event handling not handled by the scrolled window.
|
||||
@li The dialog does custom painting and/or event handling not handled by the scrolled window.
|
||||
If this problem can be solved globally, you can derive a new adapter class from
|
||||
wxStandardDialogLayoutAdapter and override its CreateScrolledWindow function to return
|
||||
wxStandardDialogLayoutAdapter and override its CreateScrolledWindow function to return
|
||||
an instance of your own class.
|
||||
@li The dialog has unusual layout, for example a vertical sizer containing a mixture of
|
||||
@li The dialog has unusual layout, for example a vertical sizer containing a mixture of
|
||||
standard buttons and other controls.
|
||||
@li The dialog makes assumptions about the sizer hierarchy, for example to show or hide
|
||||
@li The dialog makes assumptions about the sizer hierarchy, for example to show or hide
|
||||
children of the top-level sizer. However, the original sizer hierarchy will still hold
|
||||
until Show or ShowModal is called.
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -115,19 +115,19 @@
|
|||
@li avoiding the above situations and assumptions;
|
||||
@li using wxStdDialogButtonSizer;
|
||||
@li only making assumptions about hierarchy immediately after the dialog is created;
|
||||
@li using an intermediate sizer under the main sizer, a @false top-level sizer that
|
||||
@li using an intermediate sizer under the main sizer, a @false top-level sizer that
|
||||
can be relied on to exist for the purposes of manipulating child sizers and windows;
|
||||
@li overriding wxDialog::GetContentWindow to return a book control if your dialog implements
|
||||
@li overriding wxDialog::GetContentWindow to return a book control if your dialog implements
|
||||
pages: wxWidgets will then only make the pages scrollable.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection overview_dialog_propertysheet wxPropertySheetDialog and wxWizard
|
||||
|
||||
Adaptation for wxPropertySheetDialog is always done by simply making the pages
|
||||
scrollable, since wxDialog::GetContentWindow returns the dialog's book control and
|
||||
Adaptation for wxPropertySheetDialog is always done by simply making the pages
|
||||
scrollable, since wxDialog::GetContentWindow returns the dialog's book control and
|
||||
this is handled by the standard layout adapter.
|
||||
|
||||
wxWizard uses its own CanDoLayoutAdaptation and DoLayoutAdaptation functions rather
|
||||
wxWizard uses its own CanDoLayoutAdaptation and DoLayoutAdaptation functions rather
|
||||
than the global adapter: again, only the wizard pages are made scrollable.
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -29,22 +29,22 @@
|
|||
|
||||
@li @b Preparation: First of all, a data object must be created and
|
||||
initialized with the data you wish to drag. For example:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@code
|
||||
wxTextDataObject my_data("This text will be dragged.");
|
||||
@endcode
|
||||
|
||||
@li <b>Drag start</b>: To start the dragging process (typically in response to a
|
||||
mouse click) you must call wxDropSource::DoDragDrop like this:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@code
|
||||
wxDropSource dragSource( this );
|
||||
dragSource.SetData( my_data );
|
||||
wxDragResult result = dragSource.DoDragDrop( true );
|
||||
@endcode
|
||||
|
||||
@li @b Dragging: The call to DoDragDrop() blocks the program until the user releases
|
||||
the mouse button (unless you override the wxDropSource::GiveFeedback function to
|
||||
@li @b Dragging: The call to DoDragDrop() blocks the program until the user releases
|
||||
the mouse button (unless you override the wxDropSource::GiveFeedback function to
|
||||
do something special). When the mouse moves in a window of a program which understands
|
||||
the same drag-and-drop protocol (any program under Windows or any program supporting
|
||||
the XDnD protocol under X Windows), the corresponding wxDropTarget methods
|
||||
|
|
@ -56,7 +56,7 @@
|
|||
@code
|
||||
switch (result)
|
||||
{
|
||||
case wxDragCopy:
|
||||
case wxDragCopy:
|
||||
// copy the data
|
||||
break;
|
||||
case wxDragMove:
|
||||
|
|
@ -73,7 +73,7 @@
|
|||
follow the instructions below:
|
||||
|
||||
@li @b Initialization: For a window to be a drop target, it needs to have
|
||||
an associated wxDropTarget object. Normally, you will call wxWindow::SetDropTarget
|
||||
an associated wxDropTarget object. Normally, you will call wxWindow::SetDropTarget
|
||||
during window creation associating your drop target with it. You must derive a class
|
||||
from wxDropTarget and override its pure virtual methods. Alternatively, you may
|
||||
derive from wxTextDropTarget or wxFileDropTarget and override their OnDropText()
|
||||
|
|
@ -83,7 +83,7 @@
|
|||
asks the associated wxDropTarget object if it accepts the data. For this,
|
||||
a wxDataObject must be associated with the drop target and this data object will
|
||||
be responsible for the format negotiation between the drag source and the drop target.
|
||||
If all goes well, then wxDropTarget::OnData will get called and the wxDataObject belonging
|
||||
If all goes well, then wxDropTarget::OnData will get called and the wxDataObject belonging
|
||||
to the drop target can get filled with data.
|
||||
|
||||
@li <b>The end</b>: After processing the data, DoDragDrop() returns either
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -10,7 +10,7 @@
|
|||
|
||||
@page overview_docview Document/View Framework
|
||||
|
||||
Classes: wxDocument, wxView, wxDocTemplate, wxDocManager, wxDocParentFrame,
|
||||
Classes: wxDocument, wxView, wxDocTemplate, wxDocManager, wxDocParentFrame,
|
||||
wxDocChildFrame, wxDocMDIParentFrame, wxDocMDIChildFrame,
|
||||
wxCommand, wxCommandProcessor
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -25,7 +25,7 @@
|
|||
If a document's data changes, all views should be updated to reflect the change.
|
||||
The framework can provide many user-interface elements based on this model.
|
||||
|
||||
Once you have defined your own classes and the relationships between them, the framework
|
||||
Once you have defined your own classes and the relationships between them, the framework
|
||||
takes care of popping up file selectors, opening and closing files, asking the user to save
|
||||
modifications, routing menu commands to appropriate (possibly default) code, even
|
||||
some default print/preview functionality and support for command undo/redo.
|
||||
|
|
@ -33,13 +33,13 @@
|
|||
The framework is highly modular, allowing overriding and replacement of functionality
|
||||
and objects to achieve more than the default behaviour.
|
||||
|
||||
These are the overall steps involved in creating an application based on the
|
||||
These are the overall steps involved in creating an application based on the
|
||||
document/view framework:
|
||||
|
||||
@li Define your own document and view classes, overriding a minimal set of
|
||||
member functions e.g. for input/output, drawing and initialization.
|
||||
@li Define any subwindows (such as a scrolled window) that are needed for the view(s).
|
||||
You may need to route some events to views or documents, for example OnPaint needs
|
||||
You may need to route some events to views or documents, for example OnPaint needs
|
||||
to be routed to wxView::OnDraw.
|
||||
@li Decide what style of interface you will use: Microsoft's MDI (multiple
|
||||
document child frames surrounded by an overall frame), SDI (a separate, unconstrained frame
|
||||
|
|
@ -136,7 +136,7 @@
|
|||
Class: wxView
|
||||
|
||||
The wxView class can be used to model the viewing and editing component of
|
||||
an application's file-based data. It is part of the document/view framework
|
||||
an application's file-based data. It is part of the document/view framework
|
||||
supported by wxWidgets, and cooperates with the wxDocument, wxDocTemplate
|
||||
and wxDocManager classes.
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -179,7 +179,7 @@
|
|||
document templates, but each would be passed a different view class. When
|
||||
the user clicks on the Open menu item, the file selector is displayed
|
||||
with a list of possible file filters -- one for each wxDocTemplate. Selecting
|
||||
the filter selects the wxDocTemplate, and when a file is selected, that template
|
||||
the filter selects the wxDocTemplate, and when a file is selected, that template
|
||||
will be used for creating a document and view.
|
||||
|
||||
For the case where an application has one document type and one view type,
|
||||
|
|
@ -192,7 +192,7 @@
|
|||
See the example application in @c samples/docview.
|
||||
|
||||
To use the wxDocTemplate class, you do not need to derive a new class.
|
||||
Just pass relevant information to the constructor including CLASSINFO(YourDocumentClass)
|
||||
Just pass relevant information to the constructor including CLASSINFO(YourDocumentClass)
|
||||
and CLASSINFO(YourViewClass) to allow dynamic instance creation.
|
||||
|
||||
If you do not wish to use the wxWidgets method of creating document
|
||||
|
|
@ -210,10 +210,10 @@
|
|||
The wxDocManager class is part of the document/view framework supported by wxWidgets,
|
||||
and cooperates with the wxView, wxDocument and wxDocTemplate classes.
|
||||
|
||||
A wxDocManager instance coordinates documents, views and document templates.
|
||||
It keeps a list of document and template instances, and much functionality is routed
|
||||
through this object, such as providing selection and file dialogs.
|
||||
The application can use this class 'as is' or derive a class and override some members
|
||||
A wxDocManager instance coordinates documents, views and document templates.
|
||||
It keeps a list of document and template instances, and much functionality is routed
|
||||
through this object, such as providing selection and file dialogs.
|
||||
The application can use this class 'as is' or derive a class and override some members
|
||||
to extend or change the functionality.
|
||||
|
||||
Create an instance of this class near the beginning of your application initialization,
|
||||
|
|
@ -271,13 +271,13 @@
|
|||
to derive from it to allow different behaviour, such as popping up a scrolling
|
||||
list of files.
|
||||
|
||||
By calling wxFileHistory::UseMenu() you can associate a file menu with the file history.
|
||||
By calling wxFileHistory::UseMenu() you can associate a file menu with the file history.
|
||||
The menu will then be used for appending filenames that are added to the history.
|
||||
|
||||
Please notice that currently if the history already contained filenames when UseMenu()
|
||||
Please notice that currently if the history already contained filenames when UseMenu()
|
||||
is called (e.g. when initializing a second MDI child frame), the menu is not automatically
|
||||
initialized with the existing filenames in the history and so you need to call
|
||||
wxFileHistory::AddFilesToMenu() after UseMenu() explicitly in order to initialize the menu with
|
||||
wxFileHistory::AddFilesToMenu() after UseMenu() explicitly in order to initialize the menu with
|
||||
the existing list of MRU files (otherwise an assertion failure is raised in debug builds).
|
||||
|
||||
The filenames are appended using menu identifiers in the range @c wxID_FILE1 to @c wxID_FILE9.
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -63,9 +63,9 @@
|
|||
member function in a derived class will not have any effect. These member
|
||||
functions take an event argument, and the class of event differs according to
|
||||
the type of event and the class of the originating window. For size events,
|
||||
wxSizeEvent is used. For menu commands and most control commands
|
||||
wxSizeEvent is used. For menu commands and most control commands
|
||||
(such as button presses), wxCommandEvent is used. When controls get more
|
||||
complicated, then specific event classes are used, such as wxTreeEvent for
|
||||
complicated, then specific event classes are used, such as wxTreeEvent for
|
||||
events from wxTreeCtrl windows.
|
||||
|
||||
As well as the event table in the implementation file, there must also be a
|
||||
|
|
@ -152,9 +152,9 @@
|
|||
@li If the object is a wxWindow, @b ProcessEvent is recursively called on the window's
|
||||
wxValidator. If this returns @true, the function exits.
|
||||
@li @b SearchEventTable is called for this event handler. If this fails, the base
|
||||
class table is tried, and so on until no more tables exist or an appropriate
|
||||
class table is tried, and so on until no more tables exist or an appropriate
|
||||
function was found, in which case the function exits.
|
||||
@li The search is applied down the entire chain of event handlers (usually the chain has
|
||||
@li The search is applied down the entire chain of event handlers (usually the chain has
|
||||
a length of one). If this succeeds, the function exits.
|
||||
@li If the object is a wxWindow and the event is set to set to propagate (in the library only
|
||||
wxCommandEvent based events are set to propagate), @b ProcessEvent is recursively applied
|
||||
|
|
@ -232,13 +232,13 @@
|
|||
|
||||
While generically wxEvents can be generated both by user
|
||||
actions (e.g. resize of a wxWindow) and by calls to functions
|
||||
(e.g. wxWindow::SetSize), wxWidgets controls normally send wxCommandEvent-derived
|
||||
(e.g. wxWindow::SetSize), wxWidgets controls normally send wxCommandEvent-derived
|
||||
events only for the user-generated events. The only @b exceptions to this rule are:
|
||||
|
||||
@li wxNotebook::AddPage: No event-free alternatives
|
||||
@li wxNotebook::AdvanceSelection: No event-free alternatives
|
||||
@li wxNotebook::DeletePage: No event-free alternatives
|
||||
@li wxNotebook::SetSelection: Use wxNotebook::ChangeSelection instead, as
|
||||
@li wxNotebook::SetSelection: Use wxNotebook::ChangeSelection instead, as
|
||||
wxNotebook::SetSelection is deprecated
|
||||
@li wxTreeCtrl::Delete: No event-free alternatives
|
||||
@li wxTreeCtrl::DeleteAllItems: No event-free alternatives
|
||||
|
|
@ -255,7 +255,7 @@
|
|||
|
||||
In fact, you don't have to derive a new class from a window class
|
||||
if you don't want to. You can derive a new class from wxEvtHandler instead,
|
||||
defining the appropriate event table, and then call wxWindow::SetEventHandler
|
||||
defining the appropriate event table, and then call wxWindow::SetEventHandler
|
||||
(or, preferably, wxWindow::PushEventHandler) to make this
|
||||
event handler the object that responds to events. This way, you can avoid
|
||||
a lot of class derivation, and use instances of the same event handler class (but different
|
||||
|
|
@ -461,7 +461,7 @@
|
|||
@row2col{EVT_CUSTOM_RANGE(event\, id1\, id2\, func),
|
||||
The same as EVT_CUSTOM, but responds to a range of window identifiers.}
|
||||
@row2col{EVT_COMMAND(id\, event\, func),
|
||||
The same as EVT_CUSTOM, but expects a member function with a
|
||||
The same as EVT_CUSTOM, but expects a member function with a
|
||||
wxCommandEvent argument.}
|
||||
@row2col{EVT_COMMAND_RANGE(id1\, id2\, event\, func),
|
||||
The same as EVT_CUSTOM_RANGE, but
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -36,7 +36,7 @@
|
|||
Its main methods are ChangePathTo() and OpenFile(). This class
|
||||
is most often used by the end user.
|
||||
@li The wxFileSystemHandler is the core
|
||||
of virtual file systems mechanism. You can derive your own handler and pass
|
||||
of virtual file systems mechanism. You can derive your own handler and pass
|
||||
it to the VFS mechanism. You can derive your own handler and pass it to
|
||||
wxFileSystem's AddHandler() method. In the new handler you only need to
|
||||
override the OpenFile() and CanOpen() methods.
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -26,14 +26,14 @@
|
|||
|
||||
@beginDefList
|
||||
@itemdef{Point size, This is the standard way of referring to text size.}
|
||||
@itemdef{Family,
|
||||
@itemdef{Family,
|
||||
Supported families are:
|
||||
@b wxDEFAULT, @b wxDECORATIVE, @b wxROMAN, @b wxSCRIPT, @b wxSWISS, @b wxMODERN.
|
||||
@b wxMODERN is a fixed pitch font; the others are either fixed or variable pitch.}
|
||||
@itemdef{Style, The value can be @b wxNORMAL, @b wxSLANT or @b wxITALIC.}
|
||||
@itemdef{Weight, The value can be @b wxNORMAL, @b wxLIGHT or @b wxBOLD.}
|
||||
@itemdef{Underlining, The value can be @true or @false.}
|
||||
@itemdef{Face name,
|
||||
@itemdef{Face name,
|
||||
An optional string specifying the actual typeface to be used. If @NULL,
|
||||
a default typeface will chosen based on the family.}
|
||||
@itemdef{Encoding,
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -21,8 +21,8 @@
|
|||
(see @ref overview_unicode).
|
||||
|
||||
Font encoding support is ensured by several classes:
|
||||
wxFont itself, but also wxFontEnumerator and wxFontMapper. wxFont encoding
|
||||
support is reflected by a (new) constructor parameter @e encoding which takes
|
||||
wxFont itself, but also wxFontEnumerator and wxFontMapper. wxFont encoding
|
||||
support is reflected by a (new) constructor parameter @e encoding which takes
|
||||
one of the following values (elements of enumeration type @c wxFontEncoding):
|
||||
|
||||
@beginDefList
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -54,7 +54,7 @@
|
|||
giving it a menu and a status bar in its constructor. Also, any class
|
||||
that wishes to respond to any "event" (such as mouse clicks or
|
||||
messages from the menu or a button) must declare an event table
|
||||
using the macro below.
|
||||
using the macro below.
|
||||
|
||||
Finally, the way to react to such events must be done in "handlers".
|
||||
In our sample, we react to two menu items, one for "Quit" and one for
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -16,7 +16,7 @@
|
|||
|
||||
wxHTML can be used as a generic rich text viewer - for example to display
|
||||
a nice About Box (like those of GNOME apps) or to display the result of
|
||||
database searching. There is a wxFileSystem class which allows you to use
|
||||
database searching. There is a wxFileSystem class which allows you to use
|
||||
your own virtual file systems.
|
||||
|
||||
wxHtmlWindow supports tag handlers. This means that you can easily
|
||||
|
|
@ -60,7 +60,7 @@
|
|||
@endcode
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection overview_html_quickstart_disphelp Displaying Help
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
See wxHtmlHelpController.
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection overview_html_quickstart_settingup Setting up wxHtmlWindow
|
||||
|
|
@ -113,30 +113,30 @@
|
|||
wxHtmlPrintout, normal wxWidgets printout class.
|
||||
|
||||
And finally there is the low level class wxHtmlDCRenderer which you can use to
|
||||
render HTML into a rectangular area on any DC.
|
||||
render HTML into a rectangular area on any DC.
|
||||
|
||||
It supports rendering into multiple rectangles with the same
|
||||
width. (The most common use of this is placing one rectangle on each page or
|
||||
width. (The most common use of this is placing one rectangle on each page or
|
||||
printing into two columns.)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@section overview_html_helpformats Help Files Format
|
||||
|
||||
wxHTML library uses a reduced version of MS HTML Workshop format.
|
||||
Tex2RTF can produce these files when generating HTML, if you set
|
||||
Tex2RTF can produce these files when generating HTML, if you set
|
||||
@b htmlWorkshopFiles to @true in your tex2rtf.ini file.
|
||||
(See wxHtmlHelpController for help controller description.)
|
||||
|
||||
A @b book consists of three files: the header file, the contents file
|
||||
A @b book consists of three files: the header file, the contents file
|
||||
and the index file.
|
||||
|
||||
You can make a regular zip archive of these files, plus the HTML and any
|
||||
image files, for wxHTML (or helpview) to read; and the @c .zip file can
|
||||
You can make a regular zip archive of these files, plus the HTML and any
|
||||
image files, for wxHTML (or helpview) to read; and the @c .zip file can
|
||||
optionally be renamed to @c .htb.
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection overview_html_helpformats_hhp Header file (.hhp)
|
||||
|
||||
The header file must contain these lines (and may contain additional lines
|
||||
The header file must contain these lines (and may contain additional lines
|
||||
which are ignored):
|
||||
|
||||
@code
|
||||
|
|
@ -212,8 +212,8 @@
|
|||
@endcode
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection overview_html_helpformats_hhk Index file (.hhk)
|
||||
|
||||
Index files have same format as contents file except that ID params are ignored
|
||||
|
||||
Index files have same format as contents file except that ID params are ignored
|
||||
and sublists are @b not allowed.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -222,7 +222,7 @@
|
|||
The wxHTML library provides a mechanism for reading and displaying
|
||||
files of many different file formats.
|
||||
|
||||
wxHtmlWindow::LoadPage can load not only HTML files but any known file.
|
||||
wxHtmlWindow::LoadPage can load not only HTML files but any known file.
|
||||
To make a file type known to wxHtmlWindow you must create a wxHtmlFilter filter and
|
||||
register it using wxHtmlWindow::AddFilter.
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -251,15 +251,15 @@
|
|||
|
||||
@subsection overview_html_cells_conttaghandler Using Containers in Tag Handler
|
||||
|
||||
wxHtmlWinParser provides a user-friendly way of managing containers.
|
||||
wxHtmlWinParser provides a user-friendly way of managing containers.
|
||||
It is based on the idea of opening and closing containers.
|
||||
|
||||
Use wxHtmlWinParser::OpenContainer to open new a container @e within an already
|
||||
Use wxHtmlWinParser::OpenContainer to open new a container @e within an already
|
||||
opened container.
|
||||
This new container is a @e sub-container of the old one. (If you want to create a
|
||||
This new container is a @e sub-container of the old one. (If you want to create a
|
||||
new container with the same depth level you can call @c CloseContainer(); OpenContainer();.)
|
||||
|
||||
Use wxHtmlWinParser::CloseContainer to close the container.
|
||||
Use wxHtmlWinParser::CloseContainer to close the container.
|
||||
This doesn't create a new container with same depth level but it returns "control"
|
||||
to the parent container. See explanation:
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -323,7 +323,7 @@
|
|||
@li Parse text between the tag and paired ending tag (if present)
|
||||
@li Restore original parser state
|
||||
|
||||
See wxHtmlWinParser for methods for modifying parser's state.
|
||||
See wxHtmlWinParser for methods for modifying parser's state.
|
||||
In general you can do things like opening/closing containers, changing colors, fonts etc.
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection overview_html_handlers_custom Providing own tag handlers
|
||||
|
|
@ -346,7 +346,7 @@
|
|||
for details). Handler definition must start with @b TAG_HANDLER_BEGIN macro
|
||||
and end with @b TAG_HANDLER_END macro.
|
||||
|
||||
I strongly recommend to have a look at @e include/wxhtml/mod_templ.h file.
|
||||
I strongly recommend to have a look at @e include/wxhtml/mod_templ.h file.
|
||||
Otherwise you won't understand the structure of macros.
|
||||
|
||||
See macros reference:
|
||||
|
|
@ -360,7 +360,7 @@
|
|||
@li @b TAG_HANDLER_VARS:
|
||||
This macro starts block of variables definitions. (Variables are identical
|
||||
to class attributes.) Example:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@code
|
||||
TAG_HANDLER_BEGIN(VARS_ONLY, "CRAZYTAG")
|
||||
TAG_HANDLER_VARS
|
||||
|
|
@ -368,14 +368,14 @@
|
|||
wxString something_else;
|
||||
TAG_HANDLER_END(VARS_ONLY)
|
||||
@endcode
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This macro is used only in rare cases.
|
||||
|
||||
@li @b TAG_HANDLER_CONSTR(@e name):
|
||||
This macro supplies object constructor. @e name is same name as the one
|
||||
from TAG_HANDLER_BEGIN macro. Body of constructor follow after
|
||||
this macro (you must use { and } ). Example:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@code
|
||||
TAG_HANDLER_BEGIN(VARS2, "CRAZYTAG")
|
||||
TAG_HANDLER_VARS
|
||||
|
|
@ -386,7 +386,7 @@
|
|||
} // !!!!!!
|
||||
TAG_HANDLER_END(VARS2)
|
||||
@endcode
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Never used in wxHTML :-)
|
||||
|
||||
@li @b TAG_HANDLER_PROC(@e varib):
|
||||
|
|
@ -395,7 +395,7 @@
|
|||
@e tag. Body of method follows after this macro.
|
||||
Note than you must use { and } !
|
||||
Example:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@code
|
||||
TAG_HANDLER_BEGIN(TITLE, "TITLE")
|
||||
TAG_HANDLER_PROC(tag)
|
||||
|
|
@ -423,7 +423,7 @@
|
|||
@li @b TAGS_MODULE_END(@e modname):
|
||||
Ends the definition of module.
|
||||
Example:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@code
|
||||
TAGS_MODULE_BEGIN(Examples)
|
||||
TAGS_MODULE_ADD(VARS_ONLY)
|
||||
|
|
@ -442,7 +442,7 @@
|
|||
Following tables list all tags known to wxHTML, together with supported parameters.
|
||||
|
||||
A tag has general form of @c tagname param_1 param_2 ... param_n where param_i is
|
||||
either @c paramname="paramvalue" or @c paramname=paramvalue - these two are equivalent.
|
||||
either @c paramname="paramvalue" or @c paramname=paramvalue - these two are equivalent.
|
||||
Unless stated otherwise, wxHTML is case-insensitive.
|
||||
|
||||
@subsection overview_html_supptags_commonvalues Table of common parameter values
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -295,7 +295,7 @@ MyDialog::MyDialog(wxFrame *parent, wxWindowID id, const wxString &title )
|
|||
{
|
||||
wxBoxSizer *topsizer = new wxBoxSizer( wxVERTICAL );
|
||||
|
||||
// create text ctrl with minimal size 100x60 that is horizontally and
|
||||
// create text ctrl with minimal size 100x60 that is horizontally and
|
||||
// vertically stretchable with a border width of 10
|
||||
topsizer->Add(
|
||||
new wxTextCtrl( this, -1, "My text.", wxDefaultPosition, wxSize(100,60), wxTE_MULTILINE),
|
||||
|
|
@ -303,20 +303,20 @@ MyDialog::MyDialog(wxFrame *parent, wxWindowID id, const wxString &title )
|
|||
|
||||
wxBoxSizer *button_sizer = new wxBoxSizer( wxHORIZONTAL );
|
||||
|
||||
//create two buttons that are horizontally unstretchable,
|
||||
//create two buttons that are horizontally unstretchable,
|
||||
// with an all-around border with a width of 10 and implicit top alignment
|
||||
button_sizer->Add(
|
||||
new wxButton( this, wxID_OK, "OK" ),
|
||||
wxSizerFlags(0).Align().Border(wxALL, 10));
|
||||
wxSizerFlags(0).Align().Border(wxALL, 10));
|
||||
|
||||
button_sizer->Add(
|
||||
new wxButton( this, wxID_CANCEL, "Cancel" ),
|
||||
wxSizerFlags(0).Align().Border(wxALL, 10));
|
||||
wxSizerFlags(0).Align().Border(wxALL, 10));
|
||||
|
||||
//create a sizer with no border and centered horizontally
|
||||
topsizer->Add(
|
||||
button_sizer,
|
||||
wxSizerFlags(0).Center() );
|
||||
wxSizerFlags(0).Center() );
|
||||
|
||||
SetSizerAndFit(topsizer); // use the sizer for layout and set size and hints
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ if (in_stream.Read(data, nb_datas).LastError() != wxSTREAM_NOERROR) {
|
|||
// You can also get the last number of bytes REALLY put into the buffer.
|
||||
size_t really_read = in_stream.LastRead();
|
||||
|
||||
// Ok, moves to the beginning of the stream. SeekI returns the last position
|
||||
// Ok, moves to the beginning of the stream. SeekI returns the last position
|
||||
// in the stream counted from the beginning.
|
||||
off_t old_position = in_stream.SeekI(0, wxFromBeginning);
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -466,7 +466,7 @@ initialized.
|
|||
|
||||
A simple example will help understand how the scheme works. Suppose you have a
|
||||
XRC file defining a top level window @c TestWnd_Base, which subclasses wxFrame
|
||||
(any other class like @c wxDialog will do also), and has subwidgets wxTextCtrl A
|
||||
(any other class like @c wxDialog will do also), and has subwidgets wxTextCtrl A
|
||||
and wxButton B.
|
||||
|
||||
The XRC file and corresponding class definition in the header file will be
|
||||
|
|
@ -624,7 +624,7 @@ wxObject *MyControlXmlHandler::DoCreateResource()
|
|||
// do most of your work.
|
||||
// If e.g. the MyControl::Create function looks like:
|
||||
//
|
||||
// bool MyControl::Create(wxWindow *parent, int id,
|
||||
// bool MyControl::Create(wxWindow *parent, int id,
|
||||
// const wxBitmap &first, const wxPoint &posFirst,
|
||||
// const wxBitmap &second, const wxPoint &posSecond,
|
||||
// const wxString &theTitle, const wxFont &titleFont,
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -47,21 +47,21 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Adds an artist name to be shown in the program credits.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetArtists()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void AddArtist(const wxString& artist);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Adds a developer name to be shown in the program credits.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetDevelopers()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void AddDeveloper(const wxString& developer);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Adds a documentation writer name to be shown in the program credits.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetDocWriters()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void AddDocWriter(const wxString& docwriter);
|
||||
|
|
@ -72,14 +72,14 @@ public:
|
|||
translation of the string @c translator-credits from the currently used message
|
||||
catalog -- this can be used to show just the name of the translator of the
|
||||
program in the current language.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetTranslators()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void AddTranslator(const wxString& translator);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the the list of artists to be shown in the program credits.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see AddArtist()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetArtists(const wxArrayString& artists);
|
||||
|
|
@ -99,14 +99,14 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Set the list of developers of the program.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see AddDeveloper()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetDevelopers(const wxArrayString& developers);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Set the list of documentation writers.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see AddDocWriter()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetDocWriters(const wxArrayString& docwriters);
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the accelerator entry parameters.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param flags
|
||||
A combination of the wxAcceleratorEntryFlags values, which
|
||||
indicates which modifier keys are held down.
|
||||
|
|
@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Initializes the accelerator table from an array of wxAcceleratorEntry.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param n
|
||||
Number of accelerator entries.
|
||||
@param entries
|
||||
|
|
@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Loads the accelerator table from a Windows resource (Windows only).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param resource
|
||||
Name of a Windows accelerator.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Assignment operator, using @ref overview_refcount "reference counting".
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param accel
|
||||
Accelerator table to assign.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -382,7 +382,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a status value and object id to indicate whether the given point
|
||||
was on this or a child object. Can return either a child object, or an
|
||||
was on this or a child object. Can return either a child object, or an
|
||||
integer representing the child element, starting from 1.
|
||||
|
||||
@a pt is in screen coordinates.
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -70,11 +70,11 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Creates the control with the given @a anim animation.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
After control creation you must explicitely call Play() to start to play
|
||||
the animation. Until that function won't be called, the first frame
|
||||
of the animation is displayed.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Parent window, must be non-@NULL.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
|
|
@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ public:
|
|||
The window style, see wxAC_* flags.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Control name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the control was successfully created or @false if
|
||||
creation failed.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Loads an animation from a file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
The name of the file to load.
|
||||
@param type
|
||||
|
|
@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Loads an animation from the given stream.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param stream
|
||||
The stream to use to load the animation.
|
||||
@param type
|
||||
|
|
@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ public:
|
|||
@li wxANIMATION_TYPE_GIF: loads an animated GIF file;
|
||||
@li wxANIMATION_TYPE_ANI: load an ANI file;
|
||||
@li wxANIMATION_TYPE_ANY: tries to autodetect the filetype.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the operation succeeded, @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Load(wxInputStream& stream,
|
||||
|
|
@ -251,13 +251,13 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Loads an animation from a file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
A filename.
|
||||
@param type
|
||||
One of the wxAnimationType values; wxANIMATION_TYPE_ANY
|
||||
means that the function should try to autodetect the filetype.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the operation succeeded, @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool LoadFile(const wxString& name,
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -48,14 +48,14 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Creates a wxLog class for the application to use for logging errors.
|
||||
The default implementation returns a new wxLogGui class.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxLog
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual wxLog* CreateLogTarget();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Creates the wxAppTraits object when GetTraits() needs it for the first time.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxAppTraits
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual wxAppTraits* CreateTraits();
|
||||
|
|
@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ public:
|
|||
while (app.Pending())
|
||||
Dispatch();
|
||||
@endcode
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Pending()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void Dispatch();
|
||||
|
|
@ -92,24 +92,24 @@ public:
|
|||
int FilterEvent(wxEvent& event);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the user-readable application name.
|
||||
|
||||
Returns the user-readable application name.
|
||||
|
||||
The difference between this string and the one returned by GetAppName() is that
|
||||
this one is meant to be shown to the user and so should be used for the window
|
||||
titles, page headers and so on while the other one should be only used internally,
|
||||
e.g. for the file names or configuration file keys.
|
||||
By default, returns the same string as GetAppName().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@wxsince{2.9.0}
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetAppDisplayName() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the application name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks wxWidgets sets this to a reasonable default before calling
|
||||
OnInit(), but the application can reset it at will.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetAppDisplayName()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetAppName() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Gets the class name of the application. The class name may be used in a
|
||||
platform specific manner to refer to the application.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetClassName()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetClassName() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the application will exit when the top-level window is
|
||||
deleted, @false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetExitOnFrameDelete(), @ref overview_app_shutdown
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetExitOnFrameDelete() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -133,18 +133,18 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Returns the one and only global application object.
|
||||
Usually ::wxTheApp is usead instead.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetInstance()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxAppConsole* GetInstance();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a pointer to the top window.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks If the top window hasn't been set using SetTopWindow(),
|
||||
this function will find the first top-level window
|
||||
(frame or dialog) and return that.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetTopWindow()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual wxWindow* GetTopWindow() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the application will use the best visual on systems that support
|
||||
different visuals, @false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetUseBestVisual()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetUseBestVisual() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ public:
|
|||
configuration file keys.
|
||||
|
||||
By default, returns the same string as GetVendorName().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@wxsince{2.9.0}
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetVendorDisplayName() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the application is active, i.e. if one of its windows is
|
||||
currently in the foreground.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
If this function returns @false and you need to attract users attention to
|
||||
the application, you may use wxTopLevelWindow::RequestUserAttention to do it.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Called by wxWidgets on creation of the application. Override this if you wish
|
||||
to provide your own (environment-dependent) main loop.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Returns 0 under X, and the wParam of the WM_QUIT message under
|
||||
Windows.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -259,7 +259,7 @@ public:
|
|||
asserts are not left in the release code at all.
|
||||
The base class version shows the default assert failure dialog box proposing to
|
||||
the user to stop the program, continue or ignore all subsequent asserts.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param file
|
||||
the name of the source file where the assert occurred
|
||||
@param line
|
||||
|
|
@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
Return @true to continue normal execution or @false to return
|
||||
@false from OnInit() thus terminating the program.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see OnInitCmdLine()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool OnCmdLineError(wxCmdLineParser& parser);
|
||||
|
|
@ -296,7 +296,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
Return @true to continue normal execution or @false to return
|
||||
@false from OnInit() thus terminating the program.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see OnInitCmdLine()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool OnCmdLineHelp(wxCmdLineParser& parser);
|
||||
|
|
@ -310,7 +310,7 @@ public:
|
|||
processing of the standard command line options.
|
||||
Return @true to continue normal execution or @false to return @false from
|
||||
OnInit() thus terminating the program.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see OnInitCmdLine()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool OnCmdLineParsed(wxCmdLineParser& parser);
|
||||
|
|
@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Generally speaking, this function should only show a message to the user and
|
||||
return. You may attempt to save unsaved data but this is not guaranteed to
|
||||
work and, in fact, probably won't.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxHandleFatalExceptions()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void OnFatalException();
|
||||
|
|
@ -408,7 +408,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if unprocessed events are in the window system event queue.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Dispatch()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual bool Pending();
|
||||
|
|
@ -420,9 +420,9 @@ public:
|
|||
The function returns @true if the message was processed, @false otherwise.
|
||||
If you use wxWidgets with another class library with its own message loop,
|
||||
you should make sure that this function is called to allow wxWidgets to
|
||||
receive messages. For example, to allow co-existence with the Microsoft
|
||||
receive messages. For example, to allow co-existence with the Microsoft
|
||||
Foundation Classes, override the PreTranslateMessage function:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@code
|
||||
// Provide wxWidgets message loop compatibility
|
||||
BOOL CTheApp::PreTranslateMessage(MSG *msg)
|
||||
|
|
@ -440,11 +440,11 @@ public:
|
|||
Sends idle events to a window and its children.
|
||||
Please note that this function is internal to wxWidgets and shouldn't be used
|
||||
by user code.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks These functions poll the top-level windows, and their children,
|
||||
for idle event processing. If @true is returned, more OnIdle
|
||||
processing is requested by one or more window.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxIdleEvent
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool SendIdleEvents(wxWindow* win, wxIdleEvent& event);
|
||||
|
|
@ -463,7 +463,7 @@ public:
|
|||
SetAppDisplayName() is used instead.
|
||||
|
||||
By default the application name is set to the name of its executable file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetAppName()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetAppName(const wxString& name);
|
||||
|
|
@ -471,7 +471,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Sets the class name of the application. This may be used in a platform specific
|
||||
manner to refer to the application.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetClassName()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetClassName(const wxString& name);
|
||||
|
|
@ -479,11 +479,11 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Allows the programmer to specify whether the application will exit when the
|
||||
top-level frame is deleted.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param flag
|
||||
If @true (the default), the application will exit when the top-level frame
|
||||
is deleted. If @false, the application will continue to run.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetExitOnFrameDelete(), @ref overview_app_shutdown
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetExitOnFrameDelete(bool flag);
|
||||
|
|
@ -491,10 +491,10 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Allows external code to modify global ::wxTheApp, but you should really
|
||||
know what you're doing if you call it.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param app
|
||||
Replacement for the global application object.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetInstance()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void SetInstance(wxAppConsole* app);
|
||||
|
|
@ -504,7 +504,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
Currently implemented for wxGTK2-only.
|
||||
Return @true if theme was successfully changed.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param theme
|
||||
The name of the new theme or an absolute path to a gtkrc-theme-file
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -517,10 +517,10 @@ public:
|
|||
can use a specific window as the top window. If no top window is specified by the
|
||||
application, wxWidgets just uses the first frame or dialog in its top-level window
|
||||
list, when it needs to use the top window.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param window
|
||||
The new top window.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetTopWindow(), OnInit()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetTopWindow(wxWindow* window);
|
||||
|
|
@ -534,7 +534,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Note that this function has to be called in the constructor of the wxApp
|
||||
instance and won't have any effect when called later on.
|
||||
This function currently only has effect under GTK.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param flag
|
||||
If @true, the app will use the best visual.
|
||||
@param forceTrueColour
|
||||
|
|
@ -553,7 +553,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Sets the name of application's vendor. The name will be used
|
||||
in registry access. A default name is set by wxWidgets.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetVendorName()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetVendorName(const wxString& name);
|
||||
|
|
@ -783,7 +783,7 @@ int wxEntry(int& argc, wxChar** argv);
|
|||
// OnExit isn't called by CleanUp so must be called explicitly.
|
||||
wxTheApp->OnExit();
|
||||
wxApp::CleanUp();
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
return CWinApp::ExitInstance();
|
||||
}
|
||||
@endcode
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
The names of directory entries are returned without any trailing path
|
||||
separator. This gives a canonical name that can be used in comparisons.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see @ref overview_archive_byname
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetInternalName() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -327,7 +327,7 @@ enum wxStreamProtocolType
|
|||
wxArchiveClassFactory::Find can also search for a factory by MIME type
|
||||
or wxFileSystem protocol.
|
||||
|
||||
The available factories can be enumerated using
|
||||
The available factories can be enumerated using
|
||||
wxArchiveClassFactory::GetFirst() and wxArchiveClassFactory::GetNext().
|
||||
|
||||
@library{wxbase}
|
||||
|
|
@ -381,13 +381,13 @@ public:
|
|||
@code
|
||||
wxString list;
|
||||
const wxArchiveClassFactory *factory = wxArchiveClassFactory::GetFirst();
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
while (factory) {
|
||||
list << factory->GetProtocol() << _T("\n");
|
||||
factory = factory->GetNext();
|
||||
}
|
||||
@endcode
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetFirst() and GetNext() return a pointer to a factory or @NULL if no more
|
||||
are available. They do not give away ownership of the factory.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -418,7 +418,7 @@ public:
|
|||
@code
|
||||
wxString list;
|
||||
const wxChar *const *p;
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
for (p = factory->GetProtocols(wxSTREAM_FILEEXT); *p; p++)
|
||||
list << *p << _T("\n");
|
||||
@encode
|
||||
|
|
@ -529,7 +529,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
The first template parameter should be the type of archive input stream
|
||||
(e.g. wxArchiveInputStream) and the second can either be a pointer to an entry
|
||||
(e.g. wxArchiveEntry*), or a string/pointer pair (e.g. std::pairwxString,
|
||||
(e.g. wxArchiveEntry*), or a string/pointer pair (e.g. std::pairwxString,
|
||||
wxArchiveEntry*).
|
||||
|
||||
The @c wx/archive.h header defines the following typedefs:
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Empties the array: after a call to this function GetCount() will return 0.
|
||||
However, this function does not free the memory used by the array and so
|
||||
However, this function does not free the memory used by the array and so
|
||||
should be used when the array is going to be reused for storing other strings.
|
||||
Otherwise, you should use Clear() to empty the array and free memory.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ public:
|
|||
@code
|
||||
Insert("foo", 0);
|
||||
@endcode
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
If @a nIndex is equal to @e GetCount() this function behaves as Add().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Insert(const wxString& str, size_t nIndex,
|
||||
|
|
@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Sorts the array using the specified @a compareFunction for item comparison.
|
||||
@e CompareFunction is defined as a function taking two @e const wxString
|
||||
parameters and returning an @e int value less than, equal to or greater
|
||||
parameters and returning an @e int value less than, equal to or greater
|
||||
than 0 if the first string is less than, equal to or greater than the
|
||||
second one.
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -219,16 +219,16 @@ public:
|
|||
{
|
||||
return first.length() - second.length();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
...
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxArrayString array;
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
array.Add("one");
|
||||
array.Add("two");
|
||||
array.Add("three");
|
||||
array.Add("four");
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
array.Sort(CompareStringLen);
|
||||
@endcode
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -307,7 +307,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
@copydoc wxArrayString::Index()
|
||||
|
||||
This function uses binary search for wxSortedArrayString, but it ignores
|
||||
This function uses binary search for wxSortedArrayString, but it ignores
|
||||
the @a bCase and @a bFromEnd parameters.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int Index(const wxString& sz, bool bCase = true,
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -132,14 +132,14 @@
|
|||
Client is the entity that calls wxArtProvider's GetBitmap or GetIcon function.
|
||||
It is represented by wxClientID type and can have one of these values:
|
||||
|
||||
@li wxART_TOOLBAR
|
||||
@li wxART_MENU
|
||||
@li wxART_BUTTON
|
||||
@li wxART_FRAME_ICON
|
||||
@li wxART_CMN_DIALOG
|
||||
@li wxART_HELP_BROWSER
|
||||
@li wxART_MESSAGE_BOX
|
||||
@li wxART_OTHER (used for all requests that don't fit into any of the
|
||||
@li wxART_TOOLBAR
|
||||
@li wxART_MENU
|
||||
@li wxART_BUTTON
|
||||
@li wxART_FRAME_ICON
|
||||
@li wxART_CMN_DIALOG
|
||||
@li wxART_HELP_BROWSER
|
||||
@li wxART_MESSAGE_BOX
|
||||
@li wxART_OTHER (used for all requests that don't fit into any of the
|
||||
categories above)
|
||||
|
||||
Client ID servers as a hint to wxArtProvider that is supposed to help it to
|
||||
|
|
@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ public:
|
|||
resource. Note that returned bitmaps are cached by wxArtProvider and it is
|
||||
therefore not necessary to optimize CreateBitmap() for speed (e.g. you may
|
||||
create wxBitmap objects from XPMs here).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
wxArtID unique identifier of the bitmap.
|
||||
@param client
|
||||
|
|
@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ public:
|
|||
This is not part of wxArtProvider's public API, use wxArtProvider::GetBitmap
|
||||
or wxArtProvider::GetIconBundle or wxArtProvider::GetIcon to query wxArtProvider
|
||||
for a resource.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see CreateIconBundle()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxBitmap CreateBitmap(const wxArtID& id,
|
||||
|
|
@ -203,14 +203,14 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Query registered providers for bitmap with given ID.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
wxArtID unique identifier of the bitmap.
|
||||
@param client
|
||||
wxArtClient identifier of the client (i.e. who is asking for the bitmap).
|
||||
@param size
|
||||
Size of the returned bitmap or wxDefaultSize if size doesn't matter.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The bitmap if one of registered providers recognizes the ID or
|
||||
wxNullBitmap otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -238,13 +238,13 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Query registered providers for icon bundle with given ID.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
wxArtID unique identifier of the icon bundle.
|
||||
@param client
|
||||
wxArtClient identifier of the client (i.e. who is asking for the icon
|
||||
bundle).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The icon bundle if one of registered providers recognizes the ID
|
||||
or wxNullIconBundle otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -254,7 +254,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Register new art provider and add it to the bottom of providers stack
|
||||
(i.e. it will be queried as the last one).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Push()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void Insert(wxArtProvider* provider);
|
||||
|
|
@ -267,7 +267,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Register new art provider and add it to the top of providers stack
|
||||
(i.e. it will be queried as the first provider).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Insert()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void Push(wxArtProvider* provider);
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ size_t wxBase64EncodedSize(size_t len);
|
|||
The length of the input string or special value wxNO_LEN if the string is
|
||||
NUL-terminated and the length should be computed by this function itself.
|
||||
@param mode
|
||||
This parameter specifies the function behaviour when invalid characters
|
||||
This parameter specifies the function behaviour when invalid characters
|
||||
are encountered in input. By default, any such character stops the
|
||||
decoding with error. If the mode is wxBase64DecodeMode_SkipWS, then the
|
||||
white space characters are silently skipped instead. And if it is
|
||||
|
|
@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ size_t wxBase64Decode(void* dst, size_t dstLen,
|
|||
This overload allocates memory internally and returns it as wxMemoryBuffer
|
||||
and is recommended for normal use.
|
||||
|
||||
This overload returns a buffer with the base64 decoded binary equivalent
|
||||
This overload returns a buffer with the base64 decoded binary equivalent
|
||||
of the input string. In neither case is the buffer @NULL-terminated.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxMemoryBuffer wxBase64Decode(const char* src,
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -278,42 +278,42 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the background colour of the header part of the calendar window.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetHeaderColours()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxColour GetHeaderColourBg() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the foreground colour of the header part of the calendar window.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetHeaderColours()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxColour GetHeaderColourFg() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the background highlight colour.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetHighlightColours()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxColour GetHighlightColourBg() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the foreground highlight colour.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetHighlightColours()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxColour GetHighlightColourFg() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Return the background colour currently used for holiday highlighting.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetHolidayColours()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxColour GetHolidayColourBg() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Return the foreground colour currently used for holiday highlighting.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetHolidayColours()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxColour GetHolidayColourFg() const;
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -58,13 +58,13 @@ public:
|
|||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Get the caret position (in pixels).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b GetPosition()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Returns a Wx::Point
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b GetPositionXY()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Returns a 2-element list
|
||||
@c ( x, y )
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -75,13 +75,13 @@ public:
|
|||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Get the caret size.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b GetSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Returns a Wx::Size
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b GetSizeWH()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Returns a 2-element list
|
||||
@c ( width, height )
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -121,11 +121,11 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the blink time for all the carets.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Under Windows, this function will change the blink time for all
|
||||
carets permanently (until the next time it is called),
|
||||
even for the carets in other applications.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetBlinkTime()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void SetBlinkTime(int milliseconds);
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ public:
|
|||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor, creating and showing a checkbox.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Parent window. Must not be @NULL.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
|
|
@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Window validator.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Window name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Create(), wxValidator
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxCheckBox();
|
||||
|
|
@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the state of a 3-state checkbox.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Returns wxCHK_UNCHECKED when the checkbox is unchecked,
|
||||
wxCHK_CHECKED when it is checked and
|
||||
wxCHK_UNDETERMINED when it's in the undetermined state.
|
||||
|
|
@ -109,14 +109,14 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the state of a 2-state checkbox.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Returns @true if it is checked, @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetValue() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns whether or not the checkbox is a 3-state checkbox.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Returns @true if this checkbox is a 3-state checkbox, @false if
|
||||
it's a 2-state checkbox.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns whether or not the user can set the checkbox to the third state.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Returns @true if the user can set the third state of this
|
||||
checkbox, @false if it can only be set programmatically
|
||||
or if it's a 2-state checkbox.
|
||||
|
|
@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Sets the checkbox to the given state. This does not cause a
|
||||
wxEVT_COMMAND_CHECKBOX_CLICKED event to get emitted.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param state
|
||||
If @true, the check is on, otherwise it is off.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ public:
|
|||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor, creating and showing a list box.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Parent window. Must not be @NULL.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
|
|
@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Checks the given item. Note that calling this method doesn't result in
|
||||
wxEVT_COMMAND_CHECKLISTBOX_TOGGLE being emitted.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param item
|
||||
Index of item to check.
|
||||
@param check
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ public:
|
|||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor, creating and showing a choice.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Parent window. Must not be @NULL.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
|
|
@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Window validator.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Window name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Create(), wxValidator
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxChoice();
|
||||
|
|
@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the number of columns in this choice item.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks This is implemented for Motif only and always returns 1 for the
|
||||
other platforms.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ public:
|
|||
That is, while the dropdown list is shown, it returns the currently selected
|
||||
item in it. When it is not shown, its result is the same as for the other
|
||||
function.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@wxsince{2.6.2} (before this version
|
||||
wxControlWithItems::GetSelection itself behaved like
|
||||
this).
|
||||
|
|
@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the number of columns in this choice item.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param n
|
||||
Number of columns.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ public:
|
|||
After this function has been called, the clipboard owns the data, so do not
|
||||
delete
|
||||
the data explicitly.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetData()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool AddData(wxDataObject* data);
|
||||
|
|
@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ public:
|
|||
After this function has been called, the clipboard owns the data, so do not
|
||||
delete
|
||||
the data explicitly.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see AddData()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool SetData(wxDataObject* data);
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -30,12 +30,12 @@ class wxClientDataContainer
|
|||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxClientDataContainer();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
~wxClientDataContainer();
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Validator which can be used for additional date checks.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Control name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the control was successfully created or @false if
|
||||
creation failed.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if long options are enabled, otherwise @false.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see EnableLongOptions()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool AreLongOptionsEnabled() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Enable or disable support for the long options.
|
||||
As long options are not (yet) POSIX-compliant, this option allows to disable
|
||||
them.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Customization() and AreLongOptionsEnabled()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void EnableLongOptions(bool enable = true);
|
||||
|
|
@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Parse the command line, return 0 if ok, -1 if @c "-h" or @c "--help"
|
||||
option was encountered and the help message was given or a positive value if a
|
||||
syntax error occurred.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param giveUsage
|
||||
If @true (default), the usage message is given if a
|
||||
syntax error was encountered while parsing the command line or if help was
|
||||
|
|
@ -273,7 +273,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Give the standard usage message describing all program options. It will use the
|
||||
options and parameters descriptions specified earlier, so the resulting message
|
||||
will not be helpful to the user unless the descriptions were indeed specified.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetLogo()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Usage() const;
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -493,7 +493,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Returns the current print quality. This can be a positive integer, denoting the
|
||||
number of dots per inch, or
|
||||
one of the following identifiers:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
On input you should pass one of these identifiers, but on return you may get
|
||||
back a positive integer
|
||||
indicating the current resolution setting.
|
||||
|
|
@ -557,7 +557,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Sets the desired print quality. This can be a positive integer, denoting the
|
||||
number of dots per inch, or
|
||||
one of the following identifiers:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
On input you should pass one of these identifiers, but on return you may get
|
||||
back a positive integer
|
||||
indicating the current resolution setting.
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Validator which can be used for additional date checks.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Control name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the control was successfully created or @false if
|
||||
creation failed.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Invalid entries in custom colours list will be ignored on some platforms (GTK)
|
||||
or replaced with white colour on platforms where custom colours palette has
|
||||
fixed size (MSW).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxColourData
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxColourDialog(wxWindow* parent, wxColourData* data = NULL);
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ public:
|
|||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Copy constructor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param red
|
||||
The red value.
|
||||
@param green
|
||||
|
|
@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ public:
|
|||
The colour name.
|
||||
@param colour
|
||||
The colour to copy.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxColourDatabase
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxColour();
|
||||
|
|
@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
is not
|
||||
specified in flags.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@wxsince{2.7.0}
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetAsString(long flags);
|
||||
|
|
@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ public:
|
|||
and the HTML-like syntax (i.e. @c "#" followed by 6 hexadecimal digits
|
||||
for red, green, blue components).
|
||||
Returns @true if the conversion was successful, @false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@wxsince{2.7.0}
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Set(unsigned char red, unsigned char green,
|
||||
|
|
@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ public:
|
|||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Assignment operator, using a colour name to be found in the colour database.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxColourDatabase
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxColour operator =(const wxColour& colour);
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
The derived class must implement this to create the popup control.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the call succeeded, @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Create(wxWindow* parent);
|
||||
|
|
@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
The derived class may implement this to return adjusted size
|
||||
for the popup control, according to the variables given.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param minWidth
|
||||
Preferred minimum width.
|
||||
@param prefHeight
|
||||
|
|
@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ public:
|
|||
@param maxWidth
|
||||
Max height for window, as limited by
|
||||
screen size.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Called each time popup is about to be shown.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxSize GetAdjustedSize(int minWidth, int prefHeight,
|
||||
|
|
@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ public:
|
|||
until the popup is shown for the first time. It is more
|
||||
efficient, but on the other hand it is often more convenient
|
||||
to have the control created immediately.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Base implementation returns @false.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool LazyCreate();
|
||||
|
|
@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ public:
|
|||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor, creating and showing a combo control.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Parent window. Must not be @NULL.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
|
|
@ -211,7 +211,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Window validator.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Window name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Create(), wxValidator
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxComboCtrl();
|
||||
|
|
@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ public:
|
|||
This member function is not normally called in application code.
|
||||
Instead, it can be implemented in a derived class to create a
|
||||
custom popup animation.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if animation finishes before the function returns. @false
|
||||
otherwise. In the latter case you need to manually call
|
||||
DoShowPopup after the animation ends.
|
||||
|
|
@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ public:
|
|||
is properly shown after a popup animation has finished (but only
|
||||
if AnimateShow() did not finish
|
||||
the animation within it's function scope).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param rect
|
||||
Position to show the popup window at, in screen coordinates.
|
||||
@param flags
|
||||
|
|
@ -296,7 +296,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Returns disabled button bitmap that has been set with
|
||||
SetButtonBitmaps().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns A reference to the disabled state bitmap.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxBitmap GetBitmapDisabled() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Returns button mouse hover bitmap that has been set with
|
||||
SetButtonBitmaps().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns A reference to the mouse hover state bitmap.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxBitmap GetBitmapHover() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -312,7 +312,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Returns default button bitmap that has been set with
|
||||
SetButtonBitmaps().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns A reference to the normal state bitmap.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxBitmap GetBitmapNormal() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -320,7 +320,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Returns depressed button bitmap that has been set with
|
||||
SetButtonBitmaps().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns A reference to the depressed state bitmap.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxBitmap GetBitmapPressed() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -332,7 +332,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns custom painted area in control.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetCustomPaintWidth().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetCustomPaintWidth() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -341,7 +341,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Returns features supported by wxComboCtrl. If needed feature is missing,
|
||||
you need to instead use wxGenericComboCtrl, which however may lack
|
||||
native look and feel (but otherwise sports identical API).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Value returned is a combination of following flags:
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static int GetFeatures();
|
||||
|
|
@ -403,18 +403,18 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the popup window is in the given state.
|
||||
Possible values are:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@c Hidden()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Popup window is hidden.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@c Animating()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Popup window is being shown, but the
|
||||
popup animation has not yet finished.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@c Visible()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Popup window is fully visible.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsPopupWindowState(int state) const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -437,7 +437,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Removes the text between the two positions in the combo control text field.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param from
|
||||
The first position.
|
||||
@param to
|
||||
|
|
@ -448,7 +448,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Replaces the text between two positions with the given text, in the combo
|
||||
control text field.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param from
|
||||
The first position.
|
||||
@param to
|
||||
|
|
@ -460,7 +460,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets custom dropdown button graphics.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param bmpNormal
|
||||
Default button image.
|
||||
@param pushButtonBg
|
||||
|
|
@ -483,7 +483,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets size and position of dropdown button.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param width
|
||||
Button width. Value = 0 specifies default.
|
||||
@param height
|
||||
|
|
@ -507,7 +507,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the insertion point in the text field.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param pos
|
||||
The new insertion point.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -535,21 +535,21 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Extends popup size horizontally, relative to the edges of the combo control.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param extLeft
|
||||
How many pixel to extend beyond the left edge of the
|
||||
control. Default is 0.
|
||||
@param extRight
|
||||
How many pixel to extend beyond the right edge of the
|
||||
control. Default is 0.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Popup minimum width may override arguments.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetPopupExtents(int extLeft, int extRight);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets preferred maximum height of the popup.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Value -1 indicates the default.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetPopupMaxHeight(int height);
|
||||
|
|
@ -557,14 +557,14 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Sets minimum width of the popup. If wider than combo control, it will extend to
|
||||
the left.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Value -1 indicates the default.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetPopupMinWidth(int width);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Selects the text between the two positions, in the combo control text field.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param from
|
||||
The first position.
|
||||
@param to
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ public:
|
|||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor, creating and showing a combobox.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Parent window. Must not be @NULL.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
|
|
@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Window validator.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Window name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Create(), wxValidator
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxComboBox();
|
||||
|
|
@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Removes the text between the two positions in the combobox text field.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param from
|
||||
The first position.
|
||||
@param to
|
||||
|
|
@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Replaces the text between two positions with the given text, in the combobox
|
||||
text field.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param from
|
||||
The first position.
|
||||
@param to
|
||||
|
|
@ -252,7 +252,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the insertion point in the combobox text field.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param pos
|
||||
The new insertion point.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -265,7 +265,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Selects the text between the two positions, in the combobox text field.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param from
|
||||
The first position.
|
||||
@param to
|
||||
|
|
@ -277,7 +277,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Sets the text for the combobox text field.
|
||||
@b NB: For a combobox with @c wxCB_READONLY style the string must be in
|
||||
the combobox choices list, otherwise the call to SetValue() is ignored.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param text
|
||||
The text to set.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ public:
|
|||
)
|
||||
This is the default and only constructor of the wxConfigBase class, and
|
||||
derived classes.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param appName
|
||||
The application name. If this is empty, the class will
|
||||
normally use wxApp::GetAppName to set it. The
|
||||
|
|
@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ public:
|
|||
This parameter is only used by wxFileConfig when compiled
|
||||
in Unicode mode. It specifies the encoding in which the configuration file
|
||||
is written.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks By default, environment variable expansion is on and recording
|
||||
defaults is off.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ref ctor() wxConfigBase
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref dtor() ~wxConfigBase
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -136,9 +136,9 @@ public:
|
|||
config file. @e DeleteAll() is especially useful if you want to erase all
|
||||
traces of your program presence: for example, when you uninstall it.
|
||||
DeleteEntry()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
DeleteGroup()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
DeleteAll()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -182,19 +182,19 @@ public:
|
|||
from running several enumerations simultaneously, that's why you must pass it
|
||||
explicitly.
|
||||
Having said all this, enumerating the config entries/groups is very simple:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
There are also functions to get the number of entries/subgroups without
|
||||
actually enumerating them, but you will probably never need them.
|
||||
GetFirstGroup()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetNextGroup()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetFirstEntry()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetNextEntry()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetNumberOfEntries()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetNumberOfGroups()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ public:
|
|||
bool GetNextGroup(wxString& str, long& index) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
uint GetNumberOfEntries(bool bRecursive = false) const;
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -309,18 +309,18 @@ public:
|
|||
Final remark: the @e szKey parameter for all these functions can contain an
|
||||
arbitrary path (either relative or absolute), not just the key name.
|
||||
Read()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Write()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Flush()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
GetAppName()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetVendorName()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFileConfig::SetUmask
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -330,7 +330,7 @@ public:
|
|||
first of them is the expansion of environment variables in the string values
|
||||
read from the config file: for example, if you have the following in your
|
||||
config file:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
the call to @c config-Read("UserData") will return something like
|
||||
@c "/home/zeitlin/data" if you're lucky enough to run a Linux system ;-)
|
||||
Although this feature is very useful, it may be annoying if you read a value
|
||||
|
|
@ -341,11 +341,11 @@ public:
|
|||
would be to prefix the offending symbols with a backslash.
|
||||
The following functions control this option:
|
||||
IsExpandingEnvVars()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetExpandEnvVars()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetRecordDefaults()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsRecordingDefaults()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -359,18 +359,18 @@ public:
|
|||
which makes it possible to use the relative paths. To clarify all this, here
|
||||
is an example (it is only for the sake of demonstration, it doesn't do anything
|
||||
sensible!):
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@e Warning: it is probably a good idea to always restore the path to its
|
||||
old value on function exit:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
because otherwise the assert in the following example will surely fail
|
||||
(we suppose here that @e foo() function is the same as above except that it
|
||||
doesn't save and restore the path):
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Finally, the path separator in wxConfigBase and derived classes is always '/',
|
||||
regardless of the platform (i.e. it is @b not '\\' under Windows).
|
||||
SetPath()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetPath()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -382,22 +382,22 @@ public:
|
|||
returning @true if the value was found.
|
||||
If the value was not found, @a defaultVal is used instead.
|
||||
bool Read(const wxStringkey, T* value) const;
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b Read(key, default="")
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Returns a string
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b ReadInt(key, default=0)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Returns an integer
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b ReadFloat(key, default=0.0)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Returns a floating point number
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b ReadBool(key, default=0)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Returns a boolean
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Read(const wxString& key, wxString* str) const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -453,7 +453,7 @@ public:
|
|||
the new name already exists or because the function is not supported in this
|
||||
wxConfig implementation.
|
||||
RenameEntry()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
RenameGroup()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -526,22 +526,22 @@ public:
|
|||
in it. For example wxFontMapper or Unix version
|
||||
of wxFileDialog have the ability to use wxConfig class.
|
||||
Set()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Get()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Create()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
DontCreateOnDemand()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
HasGroup()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
HasEntry()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Exists()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetEntryType()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -551,22 +551,22 @@ public:
|
|||
These functions write the specified value to the config file and return @true
|
||||
on success. In the last one, function wxToString() must be
|
||||
defined for type @e T.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b Write(key, value)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Writes a string
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b WriteInt(key, value)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Writes an integer
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b WriteFloat(key, value)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Writes a floating point number
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b WriteBool(key, value)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Writes a boolean
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Write(const wxString& key, const wxString& value);
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ public:
|
|||
the latter if the help doesn't depend on the position.
|
||||
Returns @true if help was shown, or @false if no help was available for this
|
||||
window.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param window
|
||||
Window to show help text for.
|
||||
@param point
|
||||
|
|
@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ public:
|
|||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor, creating and showing a context help button.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Parent window. Must not be @NULL.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Appends several items at once to the control. Notice that calling this method
|
||||
is usually much faster than appending them one by one if you need to add a lot
|
||||
of items.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param item
|
||||
String to add.
|
||||
@param stringsArray
|
||||
|
|
@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Number of items in the strings array.
|
||||
@param clientData
|
||||
Array of client data pointers of size n to associate with the new items.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns When appending a single item, the return value is the index of
|
||||
the newly added item which may be different from the
|
||||
last one if the control is sorted (e.g. has wxLB_SORT
|
||||
|
|
@ -86,22 +86,22 @@ public:
|
|||
Note that it is an error (signalled by an assert failure in debug builds) to
|
||||
remove an item with the index negative or greater or equal than the number of
|
||||
items in the control.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param n
|
||||
The zero-based item index.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Clear()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Delete(unsigned int n);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Finds an item whose label matches the given string.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param string
|
||||
String to find.
|
||||
@param caseSensitive
|
||||
Whether search is case sensitive (default is not).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The zero-based position of the item, or wxNOT_FOUND if the
|
||||
string was not found.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -113,10 +113,10 @@ public:
|
|||
It is an error to call this function for a control which doesn't have untyped
|
||||
client data at all although it is ok to call it even if the given item doesn't
|
||||
have any client data associated with it (but other items do).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param n
|
||||
The zero-based position of the item.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns A pointer to the client data, or @NULL if not present.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void* GetClientData(unsigned int n) const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -126,17 +126,17 @@ public:
|
|||
It is an error to call this function for a control which doesn't have typed
|
||||
client data at all although it is ok to call it even if the given item doesn't
|
||||
have any client data associated with it (but other items do).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param n
|
||||
The zero-based position of the item.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns A pointer to the client data, or @NULL if not present.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxClientData* GetClientObject(unsigned int n) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of items in the control.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see IsEmpty()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
unsigned int GetCount() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -144,23 +144,23 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Returns the index of the selected item or @c wxNOT_FOUND if no item is
|
||||
selected.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The position of the current selection.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks This method can be used with single selection list boxes only,
|
||||
you should use wxListBox::GetSelections for the list
|
||||
boxes with wxLB_MULTIPLE style.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetSelection(), GetStringSelection()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetSelection() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the label of the item with the given index.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param n
|
||||
The zero-based index.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The label of the item or an empty string if the position was
|
||||
invalid.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Returns the label of the selected item or an empty string if no item is
|
||||
selected.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetSelection()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetStringSelection() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ public:
|
|||
is usually much faster than inserting them one by one if you need to insert a
|
||||
lot
|
||||
of items.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param item
|
||||
String to add.
|
||||
@param pos
|
||||
|
|
@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Number of items in the strings array.
|
||||
@param clientData
|
||||
Array of client data pointers of size n to associate with the new items.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The return value is the index of the newly inserted item. If the
|
||||
insertion failed for some reason, -1 is returned.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the control is empty or @false if it has some items.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetCount()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsEmpty() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -238,7 +238,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Replaces the current control contents with the given items. Notice that calling
|
||||
this method is much faster than appending the items one by one if you need to
|
||||
append a lot of them.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param item
|
||||
The single item to insert into the control.
|
||||
@param stringsArray
|
||||
|
|
@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ public:
|
|||
'strings'.
|
||||
@param clientData
|
||||
Client data to associate with the item(s).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns When the control is sorted (e.g. has wxLB_SORT or wxCB_SORT
|
||||
style) the return value could be different from
|
||||
(GetCount() - 1). When setting a single item to the
|
||||
|
|
@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Associates the given untyped client data pointer with the given item. Note that
|
||||
it is an error to call this function if any typed client data pointers had been
|
||||
associated with the control items before.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param n
|
||||
The zero-based item index.
|
||||
@param data
|
||||
|
|
@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ public:
|
|||
control itself is destroyed).
|
||||
Note that it is an error to call this function if any untyped client data
|
||||
pointers had been associated with the control items before.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param n
|
||||
The zero-based item index.
|
||||
@param data
|
||||
|
|
@ -302,17 +302,17 @@ public:
|
|||
if @a n == @c wxNOT_FOUND.
|
||||
Note that this does not cause any command events to be emitted nor does it
|
||||
deselect any other items in the controls which support multiple selections.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param n
|
||||
The string position to select, starting from zero.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetString(), SetStringSelection()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetSelection(int n);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the label for the given item.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param n
|
||||
The zero-based item index.
|
||||
@param string
|
||||
|
|
@ -323,10 +323,10 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Selects the item with the specified string in the control. This doesn't cause
|
||||
any command events to be emitted.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param string
|
||||
The string to select.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the specified string has been selected, @false if it
|
||||
wasn't found in the control.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ public:
|
|||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Copy constructor, uses @ref overview_trefcount "reference counting".
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param bits
|
||||
An array of bits.
|
||||
@param maskBits
|
||||
|
|
@ -58,370 +58,370 @@ public:
|
|||
it defaults to wxBITMAP_TYPE_CUR_RESOURCE. Under MacOS, it defaults to
|
||||
wxBITMAP_TYPE_MACCURSOR_RESOURCE.
|
||||
Under X, the permitted cursor types are:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBITMAP_TYPE_XBM
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Load an X bitmap file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Under Windows, the permitted types are:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBITMAP_TYPE_CUR
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Load a cursor from a .cur cursor file (only if USE_RESOURCE_LOADING_IN_MSW
|
||||
is enabled in setup.h).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBITMAP_TYPE_CUR_RESOURCE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Load a Windows resource (as specified in the .rc file).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBITMAP_TYPE_ICO
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Load a cursor from a .ico icon file (only if USE_RESOURCE_LOADING_IN_MSW
|
||||
is enabled in setup.h). Specify hotSpotX and hotSpotY.
|
||||
@param cursorId
|
||||
A stock cursor identifier. May be one of:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_ARROW
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A standard arrow cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_RIGHT_ARROW
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A standard arrow cursor
|
||||
pointing to the right.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_BLANK
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Transparent cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_BULLSEYE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Bullseye cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_CHAR
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Rectangular character cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_CROSS
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A cross cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_HAND
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A hand cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_IBEAM
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
An I-beam cursor (vertical line).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_LEFT_BUTTON
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Represents a mouse with the left button depressed.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_MAGNIFIER
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A magnifier icon.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_MIDDLE_BUTTON
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Represents a mouse with the middle button depressed.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_NO_ENTRY
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A no-entry sign cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_PAINT_BRUSH
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A paintbrush cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_PENCIL
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A pencil cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_POINT_LEFT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A cursor that points left.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_POINT_RIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A cursor that points right.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_QUESTION_ARROW
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
An arrow and question mark.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_RIGHT_BUTTON
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Represents a mouse with the right button depressed.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_SIZENESW
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A sizing cursor pointing NE-SW.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_SIZENS
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A sizing cursor pointing N-S.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_SIZENWSE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A sizing cursor pointing NW-SE.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_SIZEWE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A sizing cursor pointing W-E.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_SIZING
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A general sizing cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_SPRAYCAN
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A spraycan cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_WAIT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A wait cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_WATCH
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A watch cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxCURSOR_ARROWWAIT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A cursor with both an arrow and
|
||||
an hourglass, (windows.)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Note that not all cursors are available on all platforms.
|
||||
@param cursor
|
||||
Pointer or reference to a cursor to copy.
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ class wxDataViewEvent : public wxNotifyEvent
|
|||
public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDataViewEvent(wxEventType commandType = wxEVT_NULL,
|
||||
int winid = 0);
|
||||
|
|
@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ public:
|
|||
const wxVariant GetValue() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetColumn(int col);
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -117,12 +117,12 @@ public:
|
|||
void SetDataViewColumn(wxDataViewColumn* col);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetModel(wxDataViewModel* model);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetValue(const wxVariant& value);
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
|
@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ class wxDataViewIconTextRenderer : public wxDataViewRenderer
|
|||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDataViewIconTextRenderer(const wxString& varianttype = "wxDataViewIconText",
|
||||
wxDataViewCellMode mode = wxDATAVIEW_CELL_INERT);
|
||||
|
|
@ -584,7 +584,7 @@ public:
|
|||
*/
|
||||
virtual bool Activate( wxRect cell,
|
||||
wxDataViewModel* model,
|
||||
const wxDataViewItem & item,
|
||||
const wxDataViewItem & item,
|
||||
unsigned int col );
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
|
@ -626,7 +626,7 @@ public:
|
|||
virtual bool LeftClick( wxPoint cursor,
|
||||
wxRect cell,
|
||||
wxDataViewModel * model,
|
||||
const wxDataViewItem & item,
|
||||
const wxDataViewItem & item,
|
||||
unsigned int col );
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
|
@ -651,7 +651,7 @@ public:
|
|||
virtual bool RightClick(wxPoint cursor,
|
||||
wxRect cell,
|
||||
wxDataViewModel* model,
|
||||
const wxDataViewItem & item,
|
||||
const wxDataViewItem & item,
|
||||
unsigned int col);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
|
@ -659,7 +659,7 @@ public:
|
|||
*/
|
||||
virtual bool StartDrag(wxPoint cursor, wxRect cell,
|
||||
wxDataViewModel* model,
|
||||
const wxDataViewItem & item,
|
||||
const wxDataViewItem & item,
|
||||
unsigned int col);
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -678,7 +678,7 @@ class wxDataViewBitmapRenderer : public wxDataViewRenderer
|
|||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDataViewBitmapRenderer(const wxString& varianttype = "wxBitmap",
|
||||
wxDataViewCellMode mode = wxDATAVIEW_CELL_INERT);
|
||||
|
|
@ -756,7 +756,7 @@ class wxDataViewItem
|
|||
public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDataViewItem(void* id = NULL);
|
||||
wxDataViewItem(const wxDataViewItem& item);
|
||||
|
|
@ -1344,7 +1344,7 @@ class wxDataViewTextRenderer : public wxDataViewRenderer
|
|||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDataViewTextRenderer(const wxString& varianttype = "string",
|
||||
wxDataViewCellMode mode = wxDATAVIEW_CELL_INERT);
|
||||
|
|
@ -1365,7 +1365,7 @@ class wxDataViewProgressRenderer : public wxDataViewRenderer
|
|||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDataViewProgressRenderer(const wxString& label = wxEmptyString,
|
||||
const wxString& varianttype = "long",
|
||||
|
|
@ -1412,7 +1412,7 @@ class wxDataViewToggleRenderer : public wxDataViewRenderer
|
|||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDataViewToggleRenderer(const wxString& varianttype = "bool",
|
||||
wxDataViewCellMode mode = wxDATAVIEW_CELL_INERT);
|
||||
|
|
@ -1456,7 +1456,7 @@ public:
|
|||
~wxDataViewTreeCtrl();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDataViewItem AppendContainer(const wxDataViewItem& parent,
|
||||
const wxString& text,
|
||||
|
|
@ -1465,7 +1465,7 @@ public:
|
|||
wxClientData* data = NULL);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDataViewItem AppendItem(const wxDataViewItem& parent,
|
||||
const wxString& text,
|
||||
|
|
@ -1769,7 +1769,7 @@ class wxDataViewDateRenderer : public wxDataViewRenderer
|
|||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDataViewDateRenderer(const wxString& varianttype = "datetime",
|
||||
wxDataViewCellMode mode = wxDATAVIEW_CELL_ACTIVATABLE);
|
||||
|
|
@ -1795,7 +1795,7 @@ class wxDataViewTextRendererAttr : public wxDataViewTextRenderer
|
|||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDataViewTextRendererAttr(const wxString& varianttype = "string",
|
||||
wxDataViewCellMode mode = wxDATAVIEW_CELL_INERT,
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Validator which can be used for additional date checks.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Control name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the control was successfully created or @false if
|
||||
creation failed.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -107,14 +107,14 @@ public:
|
|||
SetRange(), returns the lower and upper
|
||||
bounds of this range. If no range is set (or only one of the bounds is set),
|
||||
@a dt1 and/or @a dt2 are set to be invalid.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param dt1
|
||||
Pointer to the object which receives the lower range limit or
|
||||
becomes invalid if it is not set. May be @NULL if the caller is not
|
||||
interested in lower limit
|
||||
@param dt2
|
||||
Same as above but for the upper limit
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @false if no range limits are currently set, @true if at least one
|
||||
bound is set.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ public:
|
|||
control. The native version always uses the current system locale.
|
||||
Sets the display format for the date in the control. See wxDateTime for the
|
||||
meaning of format strings.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks If the format parameter is invalid, the behaviour is undefined.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetFormat(const wxChar* format);
|
||||
|
|
@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Sets the valid range for the date selection. If @a dt1 is valid, it becomes
|
||||
the earliest date (inclusive) accepted by the control. If @a dt2 is valid,
|
||||
it becomes the latest possible date.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks If the current value of the control is outside of the newly set
|
||||
range bounds, the behaviour is undefined.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -35,39 +35,39 @@ public:
|
|||
some more complicated calculations to find the answer are under the
|
||||
@ref overview_datetimecalculations "Calendar calculations" section.
|
||||
IsValid()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetTicks()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetCentury()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetYear()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetMonth()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetDay()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetWeekDay()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetHour()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetMinute()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetSecond()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetMillisecond()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetDayOfYear()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetWeekOfYear()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetWeekOfMonth()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetYearDay()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsWorkDay()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsGregorianDate()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetAsDOS()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -88,17 +88,17 @@ public:
|
|||
@ref getmodifiedjuliandaynumber() MJD or
|
||||
@ref getratadie() "Rata Die number" from it.
|
||||
@ref wxdatetimejdn() "wxDateTime(double jdn)"
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref setjdn() "Set(double jdn)"
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetJulianDayNumber()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetJDN()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetModifiedJulianDayNumber()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetMJD()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetRataDie()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -110,33 +110,33 @@ public:
|
|||
All (non-const) functions in this section don't modify the time part of the
|
||||
wxDateTime -- they only work with the date part of it.
|
||||
SetToWeekDayInSameWeek()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetWeekDayInSameWeek()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetToNextWeekDay()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetNextWeekDay()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetToPrevWeekDay()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetPrevWeekDay()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetToWeekDay()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref wxDateTime::getweekday2 GetWeekDay
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetToLastWeekDay()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetLastWeekDay()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetToWeekOfYear()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetToLastMonthDay()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetLastMonthDay()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetToYearDay()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetYearDay()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -147,49 +147,49 @@ public:
|
|||
should use IsValid() method to check that the
|
||||
values were correct as constructors can not return an error code.
|
||||
@ref wxdatetimedef() wxDateTime
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref wxdatetimetimet() wxDateTime(time_t)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref wxdatetimetm() "wxDateTime(struct tm)"
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref wxdatetimejdn() "wxDateTime(double jdn)"
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref wxdatetimetime() "wxDateTime(h, m, s, ms)"
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref wxdatetimedate() "wxDateTime(day, mon, year, h, m, s, ms)"
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetToCurrent()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref settimet() Set(time_t)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref settm() "Set(struct tm)"
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref setjdn() "Set(double jdn)"
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref settime() "Set(h, m, s, ms)"
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref setdate() "Set(day, mon, year, h, m, s, ms)"
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref setfromdos() "SetFromDOS(unsigned long ddt)"
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ResetTime()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetYear()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetMonth()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref setdate() SetDay
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetHour()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetMinute()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetSecond()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetMillisecond()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref operatoreqtimet() operator=(time_t)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref operatoreqtm() "operator=(struct tm)"
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -214,21 +214,21 @@ public:
|
|||
modifies the object to which it is applied. The operators -= and += are
|
||||
defined to be equivalent to the second forms of these functions.
|
||||
@ref addts() Add(wxTimeSpan)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref addds() Add(wxDateSpan)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref subtractts() Subtract(wxTimeSpan)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref subtractds() Subtract(wxDateSpan)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref subtractdt() Subtract(wxDateTime)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref addts() oparator+=(wxTimeSpan)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref addds() oparator+=(wxDateSpan)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref subtractts() oparator-=(wxTimeSpan)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref subtractds() oparator-=(wxDateSpan)
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -237,19 +237,19 @@ public:
|
|||
There are several function to allow date comparison. To supplement them, a few
|
||||
global operators , etc taking wxDateTime are defined.
|
||||
IsEqualTo()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsEarlierThan()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsLaterThan()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsStrictlyBetween()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsBetween()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsSameDate()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsSameTime()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsEqualUpTo()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -260,7 +260,7 @@ public:
|
|||
It also accepts a few wxWidgets-specific extensions: you can optionally specify
|
||||
the width of the field to follow using @c printf(3)-like syntax and the
|
||||
format specification @c %l can be used to get the number of milliseconds.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see ParseFormat()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString Format(const wxChar* format = wxDefaultDateTimeFormat,
|
||||
|
|
@ -278,7 +278,7 @@ public:
|
|||
result exactly corresponding to the ISO standard, but it can also be useful to
|
||||
use a space as seprator if a more human-readable combined date-time
|
||||
representation is needed.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see FormatISODate(), FormatISOTime(),
|
||||
ParseISOCombined()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -328,7 +328,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Get the beginning of DST for the given country in the given year (current one
|
||||
by default). This function suffers from limitations described in
|
||||
@ref overview_tdatedst "DST overview".
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetEndDST()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxDateTime GetBeginDST(int year = Inv_Year,
|
||||
|
|
@ -342,7 +342,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Returns the current default country. The default country is used for DST
|
||||
calculations, for example.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetCountry()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static Country GetCountry();
|
||||
|
|
@ -360,9 +360,9 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Returns the object having the same date component as this one but time of
|
||||
00:00:00.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@wxsince{2.8.2}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see ResetTime()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDateTime GetDateOnly() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -381,7 +381,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Returns the end of DST for the given country in the given year (current one by
|
||||
default).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetBeginDST()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxDateTime GetEndDST(int year = Inv_Year,
|
||||
|
|
@ -400,7 +400,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Returns the @ref setjdn() JDN corresponding to this date. Beware
|
||||
of rounding errors!
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetModifiedJulianDayNumber()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetJulianDayNumber() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -451,7 +451,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Gets the full (default) or abbreviated (specify @c Name_Abbr name of the
|
||||
given month.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetWeekDayName()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxString GetMonthName(Month month,
|
||||
|
|
@ -540,7 +540,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Gets the full (default) or abbreviated (specify @c Name_Abbr name of the
|
||||
given week day.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetMonthName()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxString GetWeekDayName(WeekDay weekday,
|
||||
|
|
@ -584,7 +584,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if IsStrictlyBetween()
|
||||
is @true or if the date is equal to one of the limit values.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see IsStrictlyBetween()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsBetween(const wxDateTime& t1, const wxDateTime& t2) const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -649,7 +649,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if this date lies strictly between the two others,
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see IsBetween()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsStrictlyBetween(const wxDateTime& t1,
|
||||
|
|
@ -695,11 +695,11 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Returns the object corresponding to the current time.
|
||||
Example:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Note that this function is accurate up to second:
|
||||
UNow() should be used for better precision
|
||||
(but it is less efficient and might not be available on all platforms).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Today()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxDateTime Now();
|
||||
|
|
@ -861,31 +861,31 @@ public:
|
|||
additional argument of wxString::const_iterator type in which, if it is not
|
||||
@NULL, an iterator pointing to the end of the scanned string part is returned.
|
||||
ParseFormat()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ParseDateTime()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ParseDate()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ParseTime()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ParseISODate()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ParseISOTime()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ParseISOCombined()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxDateTime::ParseRfc822Date
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Format()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
FormatDate()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
FormatTime()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
FormatISOCombined()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
FormatISODate()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
FormatISOTime()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -910,7 +910,7 @@ public:
|
|||
calculations, date formatting and other things.
|
||||
The possible values for @a country parameter are enumerated in
|
||||
@ref overview_wxdatetime "wxDateTime constants section".
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetCountry()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void SetCountry(Country country);
|
||||
|
|
@ -1046,43 +1046,43 @@ public:
|
|||
Please note that although several function accept an extra @e Calendar
|
||||
parameter, it is currently ignored as only the Gregorian calendar is
|
||||
supported. Future versions will support other calendars.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetCountry()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetCountry()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsWestEuropeanCountry()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetCurrentYear()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ConvertYearToBC()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetCurrentMonth()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsLeapYear()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref getcenturystatic() GetCentury
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetNumberOfDays()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetNumberOfDays()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetMonthName()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetWeekDayName()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetAmPmStrings()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsDSTApplicable()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetBeginDST()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetEndDST()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Now()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
UNow()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Today()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -1097,21 +1097,21 @@ public:
|
|||
Please see the @ref overview_tdatetimezones "time zone overview" for more
|
||||
information about time zones. Normally, these functions should be rarely used.
|
||||
FromTimezone()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ToTimezone()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MakeTimezone()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MakeFromTimezone()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ToUTC()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MakeUTC()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetBeginDST()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetEndDST()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsDST()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -1132,7 +1132,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Returns the object corresponding to the midnight of the current day (i.e. the
|
||||
same as Now(), but the time part is set to 0).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Now()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxDateTime Today();
|
||||
|
|
@ -1141,7 +1141,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Returns the object corresponding to the current time including the
|
||||
milliseconds if a function to get time with such precision is available on the
|
||||
current platform (supported under most Unices and Win32).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Now()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxDateTime UNow();
|
||||
|
|
@ -1236,14 +1236,14 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a date span object corresponding to one day.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Days()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxDateSpan Day();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a date span object corresponding to the given number of days.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Day()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxDateSpan Days(int days);
|
||||
|
|
@ -1251,7 +1251,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of days (only, that it not counting the weeks component!)
|
||||
in this date span.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetTotalDays()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetDays() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -1264,14 +1264,14 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Returns the combined number of days in this date span, counting both weeks and
|
||||
days. It still doesn't take neither months nor years into the account.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetWeeks(), GetDays()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetTotalDays() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of weeks in this date span.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetTotalDays()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetWeeks() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -1283,14 +1283,14 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a date span object corresponding to one month.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Months()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxDateSpan Month();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a date span object corresponding to the given number of months.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Month()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxDateSpan Months(int mon);
|
||||
|
|
@ -1310,7 +1310,7 @@ public:
|
|||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Changes the sign of this date span.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Negate()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDateSpan Neg();
|
||||
|
|
@ -1319,7 +1319,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the date span with the opposite sign.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Neg()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDateSpan Negate() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -1360,28 +1360,28 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a date span object corresponding to one week.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Weeks()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxDateSpan Week();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a date span object corresponding to the given number of weeks.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Week()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxDateSpan Weeks(int weeks);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a date span object corresponding to one year.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Years()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxDateSpan Year();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a date span object corresponding to the given number of years.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Year()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxDateSpan Years(int years);
|
||||
|
|
@ -1433,15 +1433,15 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
GetSeconds()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetMinutes()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetHours()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetDays()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetWeeks()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetValue()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -1473,35 +1473,35 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Returns the string containing the formatted representation of the time span.
|
||||
The following format specifiers are allowed after %:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
H
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
number of @b Hours
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
M
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
number of @b Minutes
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
S
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
number of @b Seconds
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
l
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
number of mi@b lliseconds
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
D
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
number of @b Days
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
E
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
number of w@b Eeks
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
%
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
the percent character
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Note that, for example, the number of hours in the description above is not
|
||||
well defined: it can be either the total number of hours (for example, for a
|
||||
time span of 50 hours this would be 50) or just the hour part of the time
|
||||
|
|
@ -1643,15 +1643,15 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Add()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Subtract()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Multiply()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Negate()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Neg()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Abs()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -1668,27 +1668,27 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Milliseconds()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Millisecond()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Seconds()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Second()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Minutes()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Minute()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Hours()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Hour()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Days()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Day()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Weeks()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Week()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -1704,15 +1704,15 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
IsNull()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsPositive()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsNegative()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsEqualTo()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsLongerThan()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsShorterThan()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ public:
|
|||
)
|
||||
Constructs a datastream object from an output stream. Only write methods will
|
||||
be available. The second form is only available in Unicode build of wxWidgets.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param stream
|
||||
The output stream.
|
||||
@param conv
|
||||
|
|
@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ public:
|
|||
)
|
||||
Constructs a datastream object from an input stream. Only read methods will
|
||||
be available. The second form is only available in Unicode build of wxWidgets.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param stream
|
||||
The input stream.
|
||||
@param conv
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Copy from a source DC to this DC, specifying the destination
|
||||
coordinates, size of area to copy, source DC, source coordinates,
|
||||
logical function, whether to use a bitmap mask, and mask source position.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param xdest
|
||||
Destination device context x position.
|
||||
@param ydest
|
||||
|
|
@ -61,8 +61,8 @@ public:
|
|||
with the bitmap
|
||||
selected into the source device context. The Windows implementation does
|
||||
the following if MaskBlt cannot be used:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Creates a temporary bitmap and copies the destination area into it.
|
||||
Copies the source area into the temporary bitmap using the specified
|
||||
logical function.
|
||||
|
|
@ -75,8 +75,8 @@ public:
|
|||
and the background colour set to WHITE.
|
||||
ORs the temporary bitmap with the destination area.
|
||||
Deletes the temporary bitmap.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This sequence of operations ensures that the source's transparent area need
|
||||
not be black,
|
||||
and logical functions are supported.
|
||||
|
|
@ -97,9 +97,9 @@ public:
|
|||
and ysrc
|
||||
will be assumed for the mask source position. Currently only implemented on
|
||||
Windows.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks There is partial support for Blit in wxPostScriptDC, under X.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see StretchBlit(), wxMemoryDC, wxBitmap, wxMask
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Blit(wxCoord xdest, wxCoord ydest, wxCoord width,
|
||||
|
|
@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Adds the specified point to the bounding box which can be retrieved with
|
||||
MinX(), MaxX() and
|
||||
MinY(), MaxY() functions.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see ResetBoundingBox()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void CalcBoundingBox(wxCoord x, wxCoord y);
|
||||
|
|
@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ public:
|
|||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Draws a circle with the given centre and radius.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see DrawEllipse()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void DrawCircle(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, wxCoord radius);
|
||||
|
|
@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Draws an ellipse contained in the rectangle specified either with the given top
|
||||
left corner and the given size or directly. The current pen is used for the
|
||||
outline and the current brush for filling the shape.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see DrawCircle()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void DrawEllipse(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, wxCoord width,
|
||||
|
|
@ -358,7 +358,7 @@ public:
|
|||
particular, a font different from @c wxNORMAL_FONT should be used as the
|
||||
latter is not a TrueType font. @c wxSWISS_FONT is an example of a font
|
||||
which is.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see DrawText()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void DrawRotatedText(const wxString& text, wxCoord x, wxCoord y,
|
||||
|
|
@ -438,7 +438,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the current background mode: @c wxSOLID or @c wxTRANSPARENT.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetBackgroundMode()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetBackgroundMode() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -466,7 +466,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the depth (number of bits/pixel) of this DC.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxDisplayDepth()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetDepth() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -485,7 +485,7 @@ public:
|
|||
is supported, the return value will either be @c wxLayout_LeftToRight or
|
||||
@c wxLayout_RightToLeft. If RTL layout is not supported, the return value will
|
||||
be @c wxLayout_Default.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetLayoutDirection()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxLayoutDirection GetLayoutDirection() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -510,7 +510,7 @@ public:
|
|||
If the optional parameter @a font is specified and valid, then it is used
|
||||
for the text extent calculation. Otherwise the currently selected font is.
|
||||
Note that this function works both with single-line and multi-line strings.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxFont, SetFont(), GetPartialTextExtents(), GetTextExtent()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void GetMultiLineTextExtent(const wxString& string, wxCoord* w,
|
||||
|
|
@ -533,7 +533,7 @@ public:
|
|||
various platforms have a native API function that is faster or more
|
||||
accurate than the generic implementation then it should be used
|
||||
instead.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetMultiLineTextExtent(), GetTextExtent()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetPartialTextExtents(const wxString& text,
|
||||
|
|
@ -559,14 +559,14 @@ public:
|
|||
represent the maximum horizontal and vertical 'pixel' values used in your
|
||||
application, the following code will scale the graphic to fit on the
|
||||
printer page:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b GetSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Returns a Wx::Size
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b GetSizeWH()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Returns a 2-element list
|
||||
@c ( width, height )
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -599,7 +599,7 @@ public:
|
|||
If the optional parameter @a font is specified and valid, then it is used
|
||||
for the text extent calculation. Otherwise the currently selected font is.
|
||||
Note that this function only works with single-line strings.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxFont, SetFont(), GetPartialTextExtents(),
|
||||
GetMultiLineTextExtent()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -707,7 +707,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Resets the bounding box: after a call to this function, the bounding box
|
||||
doesn't contain anything.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see CalcBoundingBox()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void ResetBoundingBox();
|
||||
|
|
@ -716,7 +716,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Sets the x and y axis orientation (i.e., the direction from lowest to
|
||||
highest values on the axis). The default orientation is
|
||||
x axis from left to right and y axis from top down.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param xLeftRight
|
||||
True to set the x axis orientation to the natural
|
||||
left to right orientation, @false to invert it.
|
||||
|
|
@ -758,7 +758,7 @@ public:
|
|||
The clipping region is an area to which drawing is restricted. Possible uses
|
||||
for the clipping region are for clipping text or for speeding up window redraws
|
||||
when only a known area of the screen is damaged.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see DestroyClippingRegion(), wxRegion
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetClippingRegion(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, wxCoord width,
|
||||
|
|
@ -786,7 +786,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Sets the current layout direction for the device context. @a dir may be either
|
||||
@c wxLayout_Default, @c wxLayout_LeftToRight or @c wxLayout_RightToLeft.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetLayoutDirection()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetLayoutDirection(wxLayoutDirection dir);
|
||||
|
|
@ -799,7 +799,7 @@ public:
|
|||
The possible values
|
||||
and their meaning in terms of source and destination pixel values are
|
||||
as follows:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The default is wxCOPY, which simply draws with the current colour.
|
||||
The others combine the current colour and the background using a
|
||||
logical operation. wxINVERT is commonly used for drawing rubber bands or
|
||||
|
|
@ -819,26 +819,26 @@ public:
|
|||
Drawing to a Windows printer device context uses the current mapping mode,
|
||||
but mapping mode is currently ignored for PostScript output.
|
||||
The mapping mode can be one of the following:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxMM_TWIPS
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Each logical unit is 1/20 of a point, or 1/1440 of
|
||||
an inch.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxMM_POINTS
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Each logical unit is a point, or 1/72 of an inch.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxMM_METRIC
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Each logical unit is 1 mm.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxMM_LOMETRIC
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Each logical unit is 1/10 of a mm.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxMM_TEXT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Each logical unit is 1 device pixel.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetMapMode(int int);
|
||||
|
|
@ -896,7 +896,7 @@ public:
|
|||
coordinates, destination size, source DC, source coordinates,
|
||||
size of source area to copy, logical function, whether to use a bitmap mask,
|
||||
and mask source position.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param xdest
|
||||
Destination device context x position.
|
||||
@param ydest
|
||||
|
|
@ -922,8 +922,8 @@ public:
|
|||
with the bitmap
|
||||
selected into the source device context. The Windows implementation does
|
||||
the following if MaskBlt cannot be used:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Creates a temporary bitmap and copies the destination area into it.
|
||||
Copies the source area into the temporary bitmap using the specified
|
||||
logical function.
|
||||
|
|
@ -936,8 +936,8 @@ public:
|
|||
and the background colour set to WHITE.
|
||||
ORs the temporary bitmap with the destination area.
|
||||
Deletes the temporary bitmap.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
This sequence of operations ensures that the source's transparent area need
|
||||
not be black,
|
||||
and logical functions are supported.
|
||||
|
|
@ -958,7 +958,7 @@ public:
|
|||
and ysrc
|
||||
will be assumed for the mask source position. Currently only implemented on
|
||||
Windows.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks There is partial support for Blit in wxPostScriptDC, under X.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool StretchBlit(wxCoord xdest, wxCoord ydest, wxCoord dstWidth,
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Init() methods later in order to use the object.
|
||||
The other constructors initialize the object immediately and @c Init()
|
||||
must not be called after using them.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param dc
|
||||
The underlying DC: everything drawn to this object will be
|
||||
flushed to this DC when this object is destroyed. You may pass @NULL
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Also, before using the updated bitmap data, make sure to select it out of
|
||||
context first
|
||||
(for example by selecting wxNullBitmap into the device context).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxDC::DrawBitmap
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SelectObject(wxBitmap& bitmap);
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ public:
|
|||
You might use this pair of functions when implementing a drag feature, for
|
||||
example
|
||||
as in the wxSplitterWindow implementation.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks This function is probably obsolete since the X implementations
|
||||
allow drawing directly on the screen now. However, the
|
||||
fact that this function allows the screen to be
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ public:
|
|||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Draws a circle with the given centre and radius.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxDC::DrawEllipse
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void DrawCircle(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, wxCoord radius);
|
||||
|
|
@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Draws an ellipse contained in the rectangle specified either with the given top
|
||||
left corner and the given size or directly. The current pen is used for the
|
||||
outline and the current brush for filling the shape.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxDC::DrawCircle
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void DrawEllipse(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, wxCoord width,
|
||||
|
|
@ -339,7 +339,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the current background mode: @c wxSOLID or @c wxTRANSPARENT.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxDC::SetBackgroundMode
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetBackgroundMode() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -500,7 +500,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Resets the bounding box: after a call to this function, the bounding box
|
||||
doesn't contain anything.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxDC::CalcBoundingBox
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void ResetBoundingBox();
|
||||
|
|
@ -509,7 +509,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Sets the x and y axis orientation (i.e., the direction from lowest to
|
||||
highest values on the axis). The default orientation is the natural
|
||||
orientation, e.g. x axis from left to right and y axis from bottom up.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param xLeftRight
|
||||
True to set the x axis orientation to the natural
|
||||
left to right orientation, @false to invert it.
|
||||
|
|
@ -586,26 +586,26 @@ public:
|
|||
uses the current mapping mode, but mapping mode is currently ignored for
|
||||
PostScript output.
|
||||
The mapping mode can be one of the following:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxMM_TWIPS
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Each logical unit is 1/20 of a point, or 1/1440 of
|
||||
an inch.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxMM_POINTS
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Each logical unit is a point, or 1/72 of an inch.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxMM_METRIC
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Each logical unit is 1 mm.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxMM_LOMETRIC
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Each logical unit is 1/10 of a mm.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxMM_TEXT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Each logical unit is 1 pixel.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetMapMode(int int);
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ public:
|
|||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Can be @NULL, a frame or another dialog box.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
|
|
@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Used to associate a name with the window,
|
||||
allowing the application user to set Motif resource values for
|
||||
individual dialog boxes.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Create()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDialog();
|
||||
|
|
@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Centres the dialog box on the display.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param direction
|
||||
May be wxHORIZONTAL, wxVERTICAL or wxBOTH.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -200,10 +200,10 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Ends a modal dialog, passing a value to be returned from the ShowModal()
|
||||
invocation.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param retCode
|
||||
The value that should be returned by ShowModal.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see ShowModal(), GetReturnCode(), SetReturnCode()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void EndModal(int retCode);
|
||||
|
|
@ -211,7 +211,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Gets the identifier of the button which works like standard OK button in this
|
||||
dialog.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetAffirmativeId()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetAffirmativeId() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Gets the identifier of the button to map presses of @c ESC
|
||||
button to.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetEscapeId()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetEscapeId() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -276,10 +276,10 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the return code for this window.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks A return code is normally associated with a modal dialog, where
|
||||
ShowModal() returns a code to the application.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetReturnCode(), ShowModal(), EndModal()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetReturnCode();
|
||||
|
|
@ -295,10 +295,10 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Iconizes or restores the dialog. Windows only.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param iconize
|
||||
If @true, iconizes the dialog box; if @false, shows and restores it.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Note that in Windows, iconization has no effect since dialog
|
||||
boxes cannot be iconized. However, applications may
|
||||
need to explicitly restore dialog boxes under Motif
|
||||
|
|
@ -310,7 +310,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the dialog box is iconized. Windows only.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Always returns @false under Windows since dialogs cannot be
|
||||
iconized.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -339,10 +339,10 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
The default handler for wxEVT_SYS_COLOUR_CHANGED.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param event
|
||||
The colour change event.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Changes the dialog's colour to conform to the current settings
|
||||
(Windows only). Add an event table entry for your
|
||||
dialog class if you wish the behaviour to be different
|
||||
|
|
@ -350,7 +350,7 @@ public:
|
|||
you do override this function, call wxEvent::Skip to
|
||||
propagate the notification to child windows and
|
||||
controls.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxSysColourChangedEvent
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void OnSysColourChanged(wxSysColourChangedEvent& event);
|
||||
|
|
@ -365,7 +365,7 @@ public:
|
|||
the special OK button in the PocketPC title bar, an event with this id is
|
||||
generated.
|
||||
By default, the affirmative id is wxID_OK.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetAffirmativeId(), SetEscapeId()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetAffirmativeId(int id);
|
||||
|
|
@ -387,7 +387,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the icon for this dialog.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param icon
|
||||
The icon to associate with this dialog.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -395,7 +395,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the icons for this dialog.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param icons
|
||||
The icons to associate with this dialog.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -422,7 +422,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Sets the adaptation mode, overriding the global adaptation flag. @a mode may be
|
||||
one of the following values:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
See also @ref overview_autoscrollingdialogs "Automatic scrolling dialogs" for
|
||||
more on layout adaptation.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -443,7 +443,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Allows the programmer to specify whether the dialog box is modal (Show() blocks
|
||||
control
|
||||
until the dialog is hidden) or modeless (control returns immediately).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param flag
|
||||
If @true, the dialog will be modal, otherwise it will be modeless.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -451,26 +451,26 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the return code for this window.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param retCode
|
||||
The integer return code, usually a control identifier.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks A return code is normally associated with a modal dialog, where
|
||||
ShowModal() returns a code to the application.
|
||||
The function EndModal() calls SetReturnCode.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetReturnCode(), ShowModal(), EndModal()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetReturnCode(int retCode);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Hides or shows the dialog.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param show
|
||||
If @true, the dialog box is shown and brought to the front;
|
||||
otherwise the box is hidden. If @false and the dialog is
|
||||
modal, control is returned to the calling program.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks The preferred way of dismissing a modal dialog is to use
|
||||
EndModal().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -480,7 +480,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Shows a modal dialog. Program flow does not return until the dialog has been
|
||||
dismissed with
|
||||
EndModal().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The return value is the value set with SetReturnCode().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int ShowModal();
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Cancel dialing the number initiated with Dial()
|
||||
with async parameter equal to @true.
|
||||
Note that this won't result in DISCONNECTED event being sent.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see IsDialing()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool CancelDialing();
|
||||
|
|
@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if (async) dialing is in progress.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Dial()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsDialing() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ public:
|
|||
so, in general, the user should be allowed to override it. This function
|
||||
allows to forcefully set the online status - whatever our internal
|
||||
algorithm may think about it.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see IsOnline()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetOnlineStatus(bool isOnline = true);
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ public:
|
|||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Main constructor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Parent window.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Constructor. Use ShowModal() to show
|
||||
the dialog.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Parent window.
|
||||
@param message
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ class wxDisplay
|
|||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor, setting up a wxDisplay instance with the specified display.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param index
|
||||
The index of the display to use. This must be non-negative
|
||||
and lower than the value returned by GetCount().
|
||||
|
|
@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Returns the index of the display on which the given point lies. Returns
|
||||
@c wxNOT_FOUND if the point is not on any connected display.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param pt
|
||||
The point to locate.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ public:
|
|||
If the window is on more than one display it gets the display that overlaps the
|
||||
window the most.
|
||||
Returns @c wxNOT_FOUND if the window is not on any connected display.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param win
|
||||
The window to locate.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Override this function to receive dropped text.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param x
|
||||
The x coordinate of the mouse.
|
||||
@param y
|
||||
|
|
@ -108,14 +108,14 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Called when the mouse is being dragged over the drop target. By default,
|
||||
this calls functions return the suggested return value @e def.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param x
|
||||
The x coordinate of the mouse.
|
||||
@param y
|
||||
The y coordinate of the mouse.
|
||||
@param def
|
||||
Suggested value for return value. Determined by SHIFT or CONTROL key states.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Returns the desired operation or wxDragNone. This is used for
|
||||
optical feedback from the side of the drop source,
|
||||
typically in form of changing the icon.
|
||||
|
|
@ -126,12 +126,12 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Called when the user drops a data object on the target. Return @false to veto
|
||||
the operation.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param x
|
||||
The x coordinate of the mouse.
|
||||
@param y
|
||||
The y coordinate of the mouse.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Return @true to accept the data, @false to veto the operation.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual bool OnDrop(wxCoord x, wxCoord y);
|
||||
|
|
@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Called when the mouse enters the drop target. By default, this calls
|
||||
OnDragOver().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param x
|
||||
The x coordinate of the mouse.
|
||||
@param y
|
||||
|
|
@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ public:
|
|||
@param def
|
||||
Suggested default for return value. Determined by SHIFT or CONTROL key
|
||||
states.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Returns the desired operation or wxDragNone. This is used for
|
||||
optical feedback from the side of the drop source,
|
||||
typically in form of changing the icon.
|
||||
|
|
@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ public:
|
|||
between wxMSW and wxGTK: these are cursors under Windows but icons for GTK.
|
||||
You should use the macro wxDROP_ICON() in portable
|
||||
programs instead of directly using either of these types.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param win
|
||||
The window which initiates the drag and drop operation.
|
||||
@param iconCopy
|
||||
|
|
@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ public:
|
|||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
~wxDropSource();
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -224,13 +224,13 @@ public:
|
|||
Do it (call this in response to a mouse button press, for example). This starts
|
||||
the drag-and-drop operation which will terminate when the user releases the
|
||||
mouse.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param flags
|
||||
If wxDrag_AllowMove is included in the flags, data may
|
||||
be moved and not only copied (default). If wxDrag_DefaultMove is
|
||||
specified (which includes the previous flag), this is even the default
|
||||
operation
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Returns the operation requested by the user, may be wxDragCopy,
|
||||
wxDragMove, wxDragLink, wxDragCancel or wxDragNone if
|
||||
an error occurred.
|
||||
|
|
@ -248,13 +248,13 @@ public:
|
|||
in this function. It is called on each mouse move, so your implementation must
|
||||
not be too
|
||||
slow.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param effect
|
||||
The effect to implement. One of wxDragCopy, wxDragMove, wxDragLink and
|
||||
wxDragNone.
|
||||
@param scrolling
|
||||
@true if the window is scrolling. MSW only.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Return @false if you want default feedback, or @true if you
|
||||
implement your own feedback. The return values is
|
||||
ignored under GTK.
|
||||
|
|
@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Set the icon to use for a certain drag result.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param res
|
||||
The drag result to set the icon for.
|
||||
@param cursor
|
||||
|
|
@ -308,7 +308,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Override this function to receive dropped files.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param x
|
||||
The x coordinate of the mouse.
|
||||
@param y
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -52,23 +52,23 @@ public:
|
|||
wxTEMPLATE_VISIBLE The template may be displayed to the user in dialogs.
|
||||
wxTEMPLATE_INVISIBLE The template may not be displayed to the user in dialogs.
|
||||
wxDEFAULT_TEMPLATE_FLAGS Defined as wxTEMPLATE_VISIBLE.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b Wx::DocTemplate-new( docmgr, descr, filter, dir,
|
||||
ext, docTypeName, viewTypeName, docClassInfo, viewClassInfo, flags
|
||||
)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
will construct document and view objects from the class information
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b Wx::DocTemplate-new( docmgr, descr, filter, dir,
|
||||
ext, docTypeName, viewTypeName, docClassName, viewClassName, flags
|
||||
)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
will construct document and view objects from perl packages
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b Wx::DocTemplate-new( docmgr, descr, filter, dir,
|
||||
ext, docTypeName, viewTypeName )
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@c Wx::DocTemplate::CreateDocument() and
|
||||
@c Wx::DocTemplate::CreateView() must be overridden
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -367,7 +367,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Loads the file history from a config object.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxConfig()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void FileHistoryLoad(wxConfigBase& config);
|
||||
|
|
@ -381,7 +381,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Saves the file history into a config object. This must be called
|
||||
explicitly by the application.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxConfig()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void FileHistorySave(wxConfigBase& resourceFile);
|
||||
|
|
@ -533,7 +533,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Returns a document template by asking the user (if there is more than one
|
||||
template).
|
||||
This function is used in CreateDocument().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param templates
|
||||
Pointer to an array of templates from which to choose a desired template.
|
||||
@param noTemplates
|
||||
|
|
@ -542,7 +542,7 @@ public:
|
|||
If more than one template is passed in in templates,
|
||||
then this parameter indicates whether the list of templates that the user
|
||||
will have to choose from is sorted or not when shown the choice box dialog.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Default is @false.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDocTemplate* SelectDocumentType(wxDocTemplate** templates,
|
||||
|
|
@ -556,7 +556,7 @@ public:
|
|||
The dialog normally will not appear because the array of templates only contains
|
||||
those relevant to the document in question, and often there will only be one
|
||||
such.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param templates
|
||||
Pointer to an array of templates from which to choose a desired template.
|
||||
@param noTemplates
|
||||
|
|
@ -565,7 +565,7 @@ public:
|
|||
If more than one template is passed in in templates,
|
||||
then this parameter indicates whether the list of templates that the user
|
||||
will have to choose from is sorted or not when shown the choice box dialog.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Default is @false.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxDocTemplate* SelectViewType(wxDocTemplate** templates,
|
||||
|
|
@ -1372,7 +1372,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the list of menus that are managed by this file history object.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see UseMenu()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxList GetMenus() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -1380,7 +1380,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Loads the file history from the given config object. This function should be
|
||||
called explicitly by the application.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxConfig()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Load(wxConfigBase& config);
|
||||
|
|
@ -1398,7 +1398,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Saves the file history into the given config object. This must be called
|
||||
explicitly by the application.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxConfig()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Save(wxConfigBase& config);
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ public:
|
|||
for
|
||||
wxGenericDragImage, and can be used when the application
|
||||
supplies DoDrawImage() and GetImageRect().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param image
|
||||
Icon or bitmap to be used as the drag image. The bitmap can
|
||||
have a mask.
|
||||
|
|
@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ public:
|
|||
and Move() to show the image on the screen.
|
||||
Call EndDrag() when the drag has finished.
|
||||
Note that this call automatically calls CaptureMouse.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param hotspot
|
||||
The location of the drag position relative to the upper-left corner
|
||||
of the image.
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -192,15 +192,15 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
wxArray::Add
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxArray::AddAt
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxArray::Insert
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxArray::SetCount
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_APPEND_ARRAY()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_PREPEND_ARRAY()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -230,9 +230,9 @@ public:
|
|||
never use wxBaseArray anyhow it shouldn't be a problem) and that you should not
|
||||
derive your own classes from the array classes.
|
||||
@ref wxArray::ctordef "wxArray default constructor"
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref wxArray::ctorcopy "wxArray copy constructors and assignment operators"
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref wxArray::dtor ~wxArray
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -349,25 +349,25 @@ public:
|
|||
WX_DECLARE_OBJARRAY macros and must be fully declared before you use
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_OBJARRAY macro.
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_ARRAY()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_EXPORTED_ARRAY()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_USER_EXPORTED_ARRAY()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_SORTED_ARRAY()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_SORTED_EXPORTED_ARRAY()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_SORTED_USER_EXPORTED_ARRAY()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_DECLARE_EXPORTED_OBJARRAY()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_DECLARE_USER_EXPORTED_OBJARRAY()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_OBJARRAY()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_EXPORTED_OBJARRAY()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_USER_EXPORTED_OBJARRAY()
|
||||
To slightly complicate the matters even further, the operator - defined by
|
||||
default for the array iterators by these macros only makes sense if the array
|
||||
|
|
@ -375,33 +375,33 @@ public:
|
|||
provokes warnings from some compilers and to avoid them you should use the
|
||||
@c _PTR versions of the macros above. For example, to define an array of
|
||||
pointers to @c double you should use:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Note that the above macros are generally only useful for
|
||||
wxObject types. There are separate macros for declaring an array of a simple
|
||||
type,
|
||||
such as an int.
|
||||
The following simple types are supported:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
int
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
long
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
size_t
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
double
|
||||
To create an array of a simple type, simply append the type you want in CAPS to
|
||||
the array definition.
|
||||
For example, for an integer array, you'd use one of the following variants:
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_ARRAY_INT()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_EXPORTED_ARRAY_INT()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_USER_EXPORTED_ARRAY_INT()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_SORTED_ARRAY_INT()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_SORTED_EXPORTED_ARRAY_INT()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
WX_DEFINE_SORTED_USER_EXPORTED_ARRAY_INT()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -420,7 +420,7 @@ public:
|
|||
going to put in the array and will prevent the array code from reallocating the
|
||||
memory more times than needed.
|
||||
wxArray::Alloc
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxArray::Shrink
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -430,11 +430,11 @@ public:
|
|||
retrieve them - possibly using just the C array indexing [] operator which
|
||||
does exactly the same as wxArray::Item method.
|
||||
wxArray::GetCount
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxArray::IsEmpty
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxArray::Item
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxArray::Last
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -447,7 +447,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Detach() if you don't want this to happen. On the
|
||||
other hand, when an object is removed from a wxArray nothing happens - you
|
||||
should delete it manually if required:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
See also WX_CLEAR_ARRAY() macro which deletes all
|
||||
elements of a wxArray (supposed to contain pointers).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -459,7 +459,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Detach() if you don't want this to happen. On
|
||||
the other hand, when an object is removed from a wxArray nothing happens -
|
||||
you should delete it manually if required:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
See also WX_CLEAR_ARRAY() macro which deletes all
|
||||
elements of a wxArray (supposed to contain pointers).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -467,22 +467,22 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
WX_CLEAR_ARRAY()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxArray::Empty
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxArray::Clear
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxArray::RemoveAt
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxArray::Remove
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
wxArray::Index
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxArray::IndexForInsert
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxArray::Sort
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -493,7 +493,7 @@ public:
|
|||
@e count. If the array has already @a count or more items, nothing is
|
||||
done. Otherwise, @c count - GetCount() elements are added and initialized to
|
||||
the value @e defval.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxArray::GetCount
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetCount(size_t count);
|
||||
|
|
@ -508,7 +508,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
The notation CMPFUNCT should be read as if we had the following declaration:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
where @e T is the type of the array elements. I.e. it is a function returning
|
||||
@e int which is passed two arguments of type @e T *.
|
||||
Sorts the array using the specified compare function: this function should
|
||||
|
|
@ -538,7 +538,7 @@ public:
|
|||
a DLL under Windows and array needs to be visible outside the DLL. The third is
|
||||
needed for exporting an array from a user DLL.
|
||||
Example:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
You must use WX_DEFINE_OBJARRAY() macro to define
|
||||
the array class - otherwise you would get link errors.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -554,7 +554,7 @@ public:
|
|||
a DLL under Windows and array needs to be visible outside the DLL. The third is
|
||||
needed for exporting an array from a user DLL.
|
||||
Example:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Note that wxWidgets predefines the following standard array classes: @b
|
||||
wxArrayInt,
|
||||
@b wxArrayLong, @b wxArrayShort, @b wxArrayDouble, @b wxArrayPtrVoid.
|
||||
|
|
@ -589,7 +589,7 @@ public:
|
|||
a DLL under Windows and array needs to be visible outside the DLL. The third is
|
||||
needed for exporting an array from a user DLL.
|
||||
Example:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
You will have to initialize the objects of this class by passing a comparison
|
||||
function to the array object constructor like this:
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -24,14 +24,14 @@ class wxDynamicLibraryDetails
|
|||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Retrieves the load address and the size of this module.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param addr
|
||||
the pointer to the location to return load address in, may be
|
||||
@NULL
|
||||
@param len
|
||||
pointer to the location to return the size of this module in
|
||||
memory in, may be @NULL
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the load address and module size were retrieved, @false
|
||||
if this information is not available.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ public:
|
|||
function name.
|
||||
Returned value will be @NULL if the symbol was not found in the DLL or if
|
||||
an error occurred.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param dllHandle
|
||||
Valid handle previously returned by
|
||||
LoadLibrary
|
||||
|
|
@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Returns a handle to the loaded DLL. Use @a success parameter to test if it
|
||||
is valid. If the handle is valid, the library must be unloaded later with
|
||||
UnloadLibrary().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param libname
|
||||
Name of the shared object to load.
|
||||
@param success
|
||||
|
|
@ -218,16 +218,16 @@ public:
|
|||
it adds a @c ".dll" extension under Windows and @c "lib" prefix and
|
||||
@c ".so", @c ".sl" or maybe @c ".dylib" extension under Unix.
|
||||
The possible values for @a cat are:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxDL_LIBRARY
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
normal library
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxDL_MODULE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
a loadable module or plugin
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see CanonicalizePluginName()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxString CanonicalizeName(const wxString& name,
|
||||
|
|
@ -240,14 +240,14 @@ public:
|
|||
to the name to ensure that the plugin which is going to be loaded will be
|
||||
compatible with the main program.
|
||||
The possible values for @a cat are:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxDL_PLUGIN_GUI
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
plugin which uses GUI classes (default)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxDL_PLUGIN_BASE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
plugin which only uses wxBase
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxString CanonicalizePluginName(const wxString& name,
|
||||
|
|
@ -269,7 +269,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Returns pointer to symbol @a name in the library or @NULL if the library
|
||||
contains no such symbol.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxDYNLIB_FUNCTION()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void* GetSymbol(const wxString& name) const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Returns @true if the symbol with the given @a name is present in the dynamic
|
||||
library, @false otherwise. Unlike GetSymbol(),
|
||||
this function doesn't log an error message if the symbol is not found.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@wxsince{2.5.4}
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasSymbol(const wxString& name) const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -312,33 +312,33 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Loads DLL with the given @a name into memory. The @a flags argument can
|
||||
be a combination of the following bits:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxDL_LAZY
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
equivalent of RTLD_LAZY under Unix, ignored elsewhere
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxDL_NOW
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
equivalent of RTLD_NOW under Unix, ignored elsewhere
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxDL_GLOBAL
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
equivalent of RTLD_GLOBAL under Unix, ignored elsewhere
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxDL_VERBATIM
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
don't try to append the appropriate extension to
|
||||
the library name (this is done by default).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxDL_DEFAULT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
default flags, same as wxDL_NOW currently
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxDL_QUIET
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
don't log an error message if the library couldn't be
|
||||
loaded.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Returns @true if the library was successfully loaded, @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Load(const wxString& name, int flags = wxDL_DEFAULT);
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ public:
|
|||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor, creating and showing a list box.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Parent window. Must not be @NULL.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
|
|
@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Window style. See wxEditableListBox.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Window name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Create()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxEditableListBox();
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ public:
|
|||
wxPLATFORM_CURRENT
|
||||
wxPLATFORM_CURRENT means the platform this binary was compiled for.
|
||||
Examples:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Equivalence is defined in terms of convertibility:
|
||||
two encodings are equivalent if you can convert text between
|
||||
then without losing information (it may - and will - happen
|
||||
|
|
@ -100,19 +100,19 @@ public:
|
|||
it more than once in order to switch to another conversion.
|
||||
@e Method affects behaviour of Convert() in case input character
|
||||
cannot be converted because it does not exist in output encoding:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b wxCONVERT_STRICT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
follow behaviour of GNU Recode -
|
||||
just copy unconvertible characters to output and don't change them
|
||||
(its integer value will stay the same)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b wxCONVERT_SUBSTITUTE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
try some (lossy) substitutions
|
||||
- e.g. replace unconvertible latin capitals with acute by ordinary
|
||||
capitals, replace en-dash or em-dash by '-' etc.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Both modes guarantee that output string will have same length
|
||||
as input string.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -121,12 +121,12 @@ public:
|
|||
Notice that this function is easier to use correctly than, for example,
|
||||
ControlDown() because when using the latter you
|
||||
also have to remember to test that none of the other modifiers is pressed:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
and forgetting to do it can result in serious program bugs (e.g. program not
|
||||
working with European keyboard layout where ALTGR key which is seen by
|
||||
the program as combination of CTRL and ALT is used). On the
|
||||
other hand, you can simply write
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
with this function.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetModifiers() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -277,7 +277,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the event was a down event from the specified button (or any
|
||||
button).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param button
|
||||
Can be wxJOY_BUTTONn where n is 1, 2, 3 or 4; or wxJOY_BUTTON_ANY to
|
||||
indicate any button down event.
|
||||
|
|
@ -286,7 +286,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the specified button (or any button) was in a down state.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param button
|
||||
Can be wxJOY_BUTTONn where n is 1, 2, 3 or 4; or wxJOY_BUTTON_ANY to
|
||||
indicate any button down event.
|
||||
|
|
@ -296,7 +296,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the event was an up event from the specified button (or any
|
||||
button).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param button
|
||||
Can be wxJOY_BUTTONn where n is 1, 2, 3 or 4; or wxJOY_BUTTON_ANY to
|
||||
indicate any button down event.
|
||||
|
|
@ -523,7 +523,7 @@ public:
|
|||
the interval is set to 0; so update events will be sent as
|
||||
often as possible. You can reduce the frequency that events
|
||||
are sent by changing the mode and/or setting an update interval.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see ResetUpdateTime(), SetUpdateInterval(),
|
||||
SetMode()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -604,7 +604,7 @@ public:
|
|||
current time. It is assumed that update events are
|
||||
normally sent in idle time, so this is called at the end of
|
||||
idle processing.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see CanUpdate(), SetUpdateInterval(),
|
||||
SetMode()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -748,7 +748,7 @@ class wxMouseEvent : public wxEvent
|
|||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor. Valid event types are:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b wxEVT_ENTER_WINDOW
|
||||
@b wxEVT_LEAVE_WINDOW
|
||||
@b wxEVT_LEFT_DOWN
|
||||
|
|
@ -823,29 +823,29 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the identified mouse button is changing state. Valid
|
||||
values of @a button are:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@c wxMOUSE_BTN_LEFT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
check if left button was pressed
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@c wxMOUSE_BTN_MIDDLE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
check if middle button was pressed
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@c wxMOUSE_BTN_RIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
check if right button was pressed
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@c wxMOUSE_BTN_AUX1
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
check if the first extra button was pressed
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@c wxMOUSE_BTN_AUX2
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
check if the second extra button was pressed
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@c wxMOUSE_BTN_ANY
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
check if any button was pressed
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Button(int button);
|
||||
|
|
@ -877,7 +877,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Same as MetaDown() under Mac, same as
|
||||
ControlDown() elsewhere.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxKeyEvent::CmdDown
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool CmdDown() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -889,7 +889,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if this was a dragging event (motion while a button is depressed).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Moving()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Dragging();
|
||||
|
|
@ -915,7 +915,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Currently this function is implemented only in wxMac and returns -1 for the
|
||||
other platforms (you can still distinguish simple clicks from double-clicks as
|
||||
they generate different kinds of events however).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@wxsince{2.9.0}
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetClickCount() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -1512,7 +1512,7 @@ class wxChildFocusEvent : public wxCommandEvent
|
|||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param win
|
||||
The direct child which is (or which contains the window which is) receiving
|
||||
the focus.
|
||||
|
|
@ -1650,25 +1650,25 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the origin of the help event which is one of the following values:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b Origin_Unknown
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Unrecognized event source.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b Origin_Keyboard
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Event generated by @c F1 key press.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b Origin_HelpButton
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Event generated by
|
||||
wxContextHelp or using the "?" title bur button under
|
||||
MS Windows.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The application may handle events generated using the keyboard or mouse
|
||||
differently, e.g. by using wxGetMousePosition()
|
||||
for the mouse events.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetOrigin()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxHelpEvent::Origin GetOrigin() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -1681,7 +1681,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Set the help event origin, only used internally by wxWidgets normally.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetOrigin()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetOrigin(wxHelpEvent::Origin origin);
|
||||
|
|
@ -1780,7 +1780,7 @@ public:
|
|||
the update mode is initially wxIDLE_PROCESS_ALL. You can change the mode
|
||||
to only send idle events to windows with the wxWS_EX_PROCESS_IDLE extra window
|
||||
style set.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetMode()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static bool CanSend(wxWindow* window);
|
||||
|
|
@ -1796,7 +1796,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the OnIdle function processing this event requested more
|
||||
processing time.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see RequestMore()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool MoreRequested() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -1811,7 +1811,7 @@ public:
|
|||
during OnIdle, then the application will remain in a passive event loop (not
|
||||
calling OnIdle) until a
|
||||
new event is posted to the application by the windowing system.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see MoreRequested()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void RequestMore(bool needMore = true);
|
||||
|
|
@ -2221,10 +2221,10 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
This function posts an event to be processed later.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param event
|
||||
Event to add to process queue.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks The difference between sending an event (using the ProcessEvent
|
||||
method) and posting it is that in the first case the
|
||||
event is processed before the function returns, while
|
||||
|
|
@ -2240,7 +2240,7 @@ public:
|
|||
type. This
|
||||
is an alternative to the use of static event tables. See the 'event' or the old
|
||||
'dynamic' sample for usage.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
The identifier (or first of the identifier range) to be
|
||||
associated with the event handler function. For the version not taking this
|
||||
|
|
@ -2283,7 +2283,7 @@ public:
|
|||
added
|
||||
using the Connect() method. There is no way
|
||||
to disconnect functions connected using the (static) event tables.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
The identifier (or first of the identifier range) associated with the event
|
||||
handler function.
|
||||
|
|
@ -2317,32 +2317,32 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets user-supplied client data.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Normally, any extra data the programmer wishes to associate with
|
||||
the object should be made available by deriving a new
|
||||
class with new data members.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetClientData()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void* GetClientData();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Get a pointer to the user-supplied client data object.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetClientObject(), wxClientData
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxClientData* GetClientObject() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the event handler is enabled, @false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetEvtHandlerEnabled()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetEvtHandlerEnabled();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the pointer to the next handler in the chain.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetNextHandler(), GetPreviousHandler(),
|
||||
SetPreviousHandler(), wxWindow::PushEventHandler,
|
||||
wxWindow::PopEventHandler
|
||||
|
|
@ -2351,7 +2351,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the pointer to the previous handler in the chain.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetPreviousHandler(), GetNextHandler(),
|
||||
SetNextHandler(), wxWindow::PushEventHandler,
|
||||
wxWindow::PopEventHandler
|
||||
|
|
@ -2361,18 +2361,18 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Processes an event, searching event tables and calling zero or more suitable
|
||||
event handler function(s).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param event
|
||||
Event to process.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if a suitable event handler function was found and
|
||||
executed, and the function did not call wxEvent::Skip.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Normally, your application would not call this function: it is
|
||||
called in the wxWidgets implementation to dispatch
|
||||
incoming user interface events to the framework (and
|
||||
application).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SearchEventTable()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual bool ProcessEvent(wxEvent& event);
|
||||
|
|
@ -2382,13 +2382,13 @@ public:
|
|||
and handles any exceptions that occur in the process. If an exception is
|
||||
thrown in event handler, wxApp::OnExceptionInMainLoop
|
||||
is called.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param event
|
||||
Event to process.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the event was processed, @false if no handler was found
|
||||
or an exception was thrown.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxWindow::HandleWindowEvent
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool SafelyProcessEvent(wxEvent& event);
|
||||
|
|
@ -2397,18 +2397,18 @@ public:
|
|||
Searches the event table, executing an event handler function if an appropriate
|
||||
one
|
||||
is found.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param table
|
||||
Event table to be searched.
|
||||
@param event
|
||||
Event to be matched against an event table entry.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if a suitable event handler function was found and
|
||||
executed, and the function did not call wxEvent::Skip.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks This function looks through the object's event table and tries
|
||||
to find an entry that will match the event.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see ProcessEvent()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual bool SearchEventTable(wxEventTable& table,
|
||||
|
|
@ -2416,47 +2416,47 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets user-supplied client data.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param data
|
||||
Data to be associated with the event handler.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Normally, any extra data the programmer wishes to associate with
|
||||
the object should be made available by deriving a new
|
||||
class with new data members. You must not call this
|
||||
method and SetClientObject on the same class - only one
|
||||
of them.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetClientData()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetClientData(void* data);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Set the client data object. Any previous object will be deleted.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetClientObject(), wxClientData
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetClientObject(wxClientData* data);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Enables or disables the event handler.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param enabled
|
||||
@true if the event handler is to be enabled, @false if it is to be disabled.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks You can use this function to avoid having to remove the event
|
||||
handler from the chain, for example when implementing a
|
||||
dialog editor and changing from edit to test mode.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetEvtHandlerEnabled()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetEvtHandlerEnabled(bool enabled);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the pointer to the next handler.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param handler
|
||||
Event handler to be set as the next handler.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetNextHandler(), SetPreviousHandler(),
|
||||
GetPreviousHandler(), wxWindow::PushEventHandler,
|
||||
wxWindow::PopEventHandler
|
||||
|
|
@ -2465,7 +2465,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the pointer to the previous handler.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param handler
|
||||
Event handler to be set as the previous handler.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -2767,7 +2767,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the cursor specified by this event is a valid cursor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks You cannot specify wxNullCursor with this event, as it is not
|
||||
considered a valid cursor.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ public:
|
|||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Opens a file with the given file pointer, which has already been opened.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param filename
|
||||
The filename.
|
||||
@param mode
|
||||
|
|
@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ public:
|
|||
read.
|
||||
Also note that this method may only be called for opened files and may crash if
|
||||
the file is not opened.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see IsOpened()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Eof() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ public:
|
|||
@c ferror() function.
|
||||
Please note that this method may only be called for opened files and may crash
|
||||
if the file is not opened.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see IsOpened()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Opens the file, returning @true if successful.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param filename
|
||||
The filename.
|
||||
@param mode
|
||||
|
|
@ -127,12 +127,12 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Reads the specified number of bytes into a buffer, returning the actual number
|
||||
read.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param buffer
|
||||
A buffer to receive the data.
|
||||
@param count
|
||||
The number of bytes to read.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The number of bytes read.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
size_t Read(void* buffer, size_t count);
|
||||
|
|
@ -140,20 +140,20 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
)
|
||||
Reads the entire contents of the file into a string.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param str
|
||||
String to read data into.
|
||||
@param conv
|
||||
Conversion object to use in Unicode build; by default supposes
|
||||
that file contents is encoded in UTF-8.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if file was read successfully, @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool ReadAll(wxString* str);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Seeks to the specified position and returns @true on success.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param ofs
|
||||
Offset to seek to.
|
||||
@param mode
|
||||
|
|
@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Moves the file pointer to the specified number of bytes before the end of the
|
||||
file
|
||||
and returns @true on success.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param ofs
|
||||
Number of bytes before the end of the file.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Associates the file with the given file descriptor, which has already been
|
||||
opened.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param filename
|
||||
The filename.
|
||||
@param mode
|
||||
|
|
@ -254,7 +254,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Opens the file, returning @true if successful.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param filename
|
||||
The filename.
|
||||
@param mode
|
||||
|
|
@ -275,12 +275,12 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Seeks to the specified position.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param ofs
|
||||
Offset to seek to.
|
||||
@param mode
|
||||
One of wxFromStart, wxFromEnd, wxFromCurrent.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The actual offset position achieved, or wxInvalidOffset on
|
||||
failure.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -291,10 +291,10 @@ public:
|
|||
Moves the file pointer to the specified number of bytes relative to the end of
|
||||
the file. For example, @c SeekEnd(-5) would position the pointer 5
|
||||
bytes before the end.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param ofs
|
||||
Number of bytes before the end of the file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The actual offset position achieved, or wxInvalidOffset on
|
||||
failure.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ public:
|
|||
)
|
||||
Read the config data from the specified stream instead of the associated file,
|
||||
as usual.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Save()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxFileConfig(wxInputStream& is);
|
||||
|
|
@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ public:
|
|||
after saving it successfully, the dirty flag is reset so no changes will be
|
||||
written back to the file this object is associated with until you change its
|
||||
contents again.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxConfigBase::Flush
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Save(wxOutputStream& os);
|
||||
|
|
@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ public:
|
|||
some sensitive information, such as passwords), you could use
|
||||
@c SetUmask(0077).
|
||||
This function doesn't do anything on non-Unix platforms.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxCHANGE_UMASK()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetUmask(int mode);
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Initial size.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Control name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the control was successfully created or @false if
|
||||
creation failed.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ public:
|
|||
function should only be used with the controls having the @c wxFC_MULTIPLE
|
||||
style,
|
||||
use GetFilename() for the others.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks filenames is emptied first.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void GetFilenames(wxArrayString& filenames) const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Fills the array @a paths with the full paths of the files chosen. This
|
||||
function should be used with the controls having the @c wxFC_MULTIPLE style,
|
||||
use GetPath() otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks paths is emptied first.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void GetPaths(wxArrayString& paths) const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -139,14 +139,14 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets(changes) the current directory displayed in the control.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Returns @true on success, @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool SetDirectory(const wxString& directory);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Selects a certain file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Returns @true on success, @false otherwise
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool SetFilename(const wxString& filename);
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ class wxFileDialog : public wxDialog
|
|||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor. Use ShowModal() to show the dialog.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Parent window.
|
||||
@param message
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Makes this object refer to the current working directory on the specified
|
||||
volume (or current volume if @a volume is empty).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetCwd()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void AssignCwd(const wxString& volume = wxEmptyString);
|
||||
|
|
@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Removes the extension from the file name resulting in a
|
||||
file name with no trailing dot.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetExt(), SetEmptyExt()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetClearExt();
|
||||
|
|
@ -172,12 +172,12 @@ public:
|
|||
If @a fileTemp is @NULL, the file is only created, but not opened.
|
||||
Under Unix, the temporary file will have read and write permissions for the
|
||||
owner only to minimize the security problems.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param prefix
|
||||
Prefix to use for the temporary file name construction
|
||||
@param fileTemp
|
||||
The file to open or @NULL to just get the name
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The full temporary file name or an empty string on error.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxString CreateTempFileName(const wxString& prefix,
|
||||
|
|
@ -202,37 +202,37 @@ public:
|
|||
These functions allow to examine and modify the individual directories of the
|
||||
path:
|
||||
AppendDir()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
InsertDir()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetDirCount()
|
||||
PrependDir()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
RemoveDir()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
RemoveLastDir()
|
||||
To change the components of the file name individually you can use the
|
||||
following functions:
|
||||
GetExt()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetName()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetVolume()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
HasExt()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
HasName()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
HasVolume()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetExt()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ClearExt()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetEmptyExt()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetName()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetVolume()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -240,21 +240,21 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
You can initialize a wxFileName instance using one of the following functions:
|
||||
@ref wxfilename() "wxFileName constructors"
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Assign()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
AssignCwd()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
AssignDir()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
AssignHomeDir()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref assigntempfilename() AssignHomeTempFileName
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
DirName()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
FileName()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref operatorassign() "operator ="
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -300,13 +300,13 @@ public:
|
|||
or @ref operatorequal() "operator ==".
|
||||
For testing basic access modes, you can use:
|
||||
IsDirWritable()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsDirReadable()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsFileWritable()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsFileReadable()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsFileExecutable()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -314,7 +314,7 @@ public:
|
|||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the file with this name exists.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see DirExists()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool FileExists();
|
||||
|
|
@ -332,10 +332,10 @@ public:
|
|||
Retrieves the value of the current working directory on the specified volume. If
|
||||
the volume is empty, the program's current working directory is returned for the
|
||||
current volume.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns The string containing the current working directory or an empty
|
||||
string on error.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see AssignCwd()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxString GetCwd(const wxString& volume = "");
|
||||
|
|
@ -414,7 +414,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the name part of the filename (without extension).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetFullName()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetName() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -422,15 +422,15 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Returns the path part of the filename (without the name or extension). The
|
||||
possible flags values are:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b wxPATH_GET_VOLUME
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Return the path with the volume (does
|
||||
nothing for the filename formats without volumes), otherwise the path without
|
||||
volume part is returned.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@b wxPATH_GET_SEPARATOR
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Return the path with the trailing
|
||||
separator, if this flag is not given there will be no separator at the end of
|
||||
the path.
|
||||
|
|
@ -443,7 +443,7 @@ public:
|
|||
@c wxPATH_DOS there is only one path separator anyhow, but for DOS there
|
||||
are two of them and the native one, i.e. the backslash is returned by this
|
||||
method.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetPathSeparators()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxChar GetPathSeparator(wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE);
|
||||
|
|
@ -453,7 +453,7 @@ public:
|
|||
formats but @c wxPATH_DOS this string contains only one character but for
|
||||
DOS and Windows both @c '/' and @c '\' may be used as
|
||||
separators.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetPathSeparator()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxString GetPathSeparators(wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE);
|
||||
|
|
@ -510,7 +510,7 @@ public:
|
|||
file specified by GetFullPath().
|
||||
Any of the pointers may be @NULL if the corresponding time is not
|
||||
needed.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true on success, @false if we failed to retrieve the times.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetTimes(wxDateTime* dtAccess, wxDateTime* dtMod,
|
||||
|
|
@ -662,7 +662,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Make the file name absolute. This is a shortcut for
|
||||
@c wxFileName::Normalize(wxPATH_NORM_DOTS | wxPATH_NORM_ABSOLUTE |
|
||||
wxPATH_NORM_TILDE, cwd, format).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see MakeRelativeTo(), Normalize(), IsAbsolute()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool MakeAbsolute(const wxString& cwd = wxEmptyString,
|
||||
|
|
@ -670,22 +670,22 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
This function tries to put this file name in a form relative to
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param pathBase.
|
||||
In other words, it returns the file name which should be used to access this
|
||||
file if the current directory were pathBase.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
pathBase
|
||||
the directory to use as root, current directory is used by
|
||||
default
|
||||
@param format
|
||||
the file name format, native by default
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the file name has been changed, @false if we failed to do
|
||||
anything with it (currently this only happens if the
|
||||
file name is on a volume different from the volume
|
||||
specified by pathBase).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Normalize()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool MakeRelativeTo(const wxString& pathBase = wxEmptyString,
|
||||
|
|
@ -701,7 +701,7 @@ public:
|
|||
if the flags contain wxPATH_MKDIR_FULL flag,
|
||||
try to create each directory in the path and also don't return an error
|
||||
if the target directory already exists.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns Returns @true if the directory was successfully created, @false
|
||||
otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -714,106 +714,106 @@ public:
|
|||
Normalize the path. With the default flags value, the path will be
|
||||
made absolute, without any ".." and "." and all environment
|
||||
variables will be expanded in it.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param flags
|
||||
The kind of normalization to do with the file name. It can be
|
||||
any or-combination of the following constants:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxPATH_NORM_ENV_VARS
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
replace env vars with their values
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxPATH_NORM_DOTS
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
squeeze all .. and . when possible; if there are too many .. and thus they
|
||||
cannot be all removed, @false will be returned
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxPATH_NORM_CASE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
if filesystem is case insensitive, transform to lower case
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxPATH_NORM_ABSOLUTE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
make the path absolute prepending cwd
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxPATH_NORM_LONG
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
make the path the long form
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxPATH_NORM_SHORTCUT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
resolve if it is a shortcut (Windows only)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxPATH_NORM_TILDE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
replace ~ and ~user (Unix only)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxPATH_NORM_ALL
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
all of previous flags except wxPATH_NORM_CASE
|
||||
@param cwd
|
||||
If not empty, this directory will be used instead of current
|
||||
working directory in normalization (see wxPATH_NORM_ABSOLUTE).
|
||||
@param format
|
||||
The file name format to use when processing the paths, native by default.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if normalization was successfully or @false otherwise.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool Normalize(int flags = wxPATH_NORM_ALL,
|
||||
|
|
@ -827,15 +827,15 @@ public:
|
|||
one day (so it is really the access date and not time). The access time may be
|
||||
updated when the file is executed or not depending on the platform.
|
||||
GetModificationTime()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetTimes()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetTimes()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Touch()
|
||||
Other file system operations functions are:
|
||||
Mkdir()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Rmdir()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -848,7 +848,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Removes the specified directory component from the path.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetDirCount()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void RemoveDir(size_t pos);
|
||||
|
|
@ -884,7 +884,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Sets the extension of the file name to be an empty extension.
|
||||
This is different from having no extension at all as the file
|
||||
name will have a trailing dot after a call to this method.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetExt(), ClearExt()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetEmptyExt();
|
||||
|
|
@ -894,7 +894,7 @@ public:
|
|||
as the extension will remove the extension resulting in a file
|
||||
name without a trailing dot, unlike a call to
|
||||
SetEmptyExt().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetEmptyExt(), ClearExt()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetExt(const wxString& ext);
|
||||
|
|
@ -906,7 +906,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the name part (without extension).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetFullName()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetName(const wxString& name);
|
||||
|
|
@ -962,7 +962,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Splits the given @a fullpath into the volume part (which may be empty) and
|
||||
the pure path part, not containing any volume.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SplitPath()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void SplitVolume(const wxString& fullpath,
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Validator which can be used for additional date checks.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Control name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the control was successfully created or @false if
|
||||
creation failed.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Validator which can be used for additional date checks.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Control name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the control was successfully created or @false if
|
||||
creation failed.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ public:
|
|||
@b Caution! Unless @a is_dir is @true the @a location parameter
|
||||
is not the directory name but the name of the file in this directory. All these
|
||||
commands change the path to "dir/subdir/":
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param location
|
||||
the new location. Its meaning depends on the value of is_dir
|
||||
@param is_dir
|
||||
|
|
@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Converts filename into URL.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see URLToFileName(), wxFileName
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxString FileNameToURL(wxFileName filename);
|
||||
|
|
@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ public:
|
|||
@e path. If the file is found in any directory, returns @true and the full
|
||||
path of the file in @e str, otherwise returns @false and doesn't modify
|
||||
@e str.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param str
|
||||
Receives the full path of the file, must not be @NULL
|
||||
@param path
|
||||
|
|
@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ public:
|
|||
absolute path. Note that the user is responsible for deleting the returned
|
||||
wxFSFile.
|
||||
@a flags can be one or more of the following bit values ored together:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A stream opened with just the default @e wxFS_READ flag may
|
||||
or may not be seekable depending on the underlying source.
|
||||
Passing @e wxFS_READ | wxFS_SEEKABLE for @a flags will
|
||||
|
|
@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ class wxFSFile : public wxObject
|
|||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor. You probably won't use it. See Notes for details.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param stream
|
||||
The input stream that will be used to access data
|
||||
@param location
|
||||
|
|
@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Returns anchor (if present). The term of @b anchor can be easily
|
||||
explained using few examples:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Usually an anchor is presented only if the MIME type is 'text/html'.
|
||||
But it may have some meaning with other files;
|
||||
for example myanim.avi#200 may refer to position in animation
|
||||
|
|
@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Returns @true if the handler is able to open this file. This function doesn't
|
||||
check whether the file exists or not, it only checks if it knows the protocol.
|
||||
Example:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Must be overridden in derived handlers.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual bool CanOpen(const wxString& location);
|
||||
|
|
@ -313,7 +313,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Opens the file and returns wxFSFile pointer or @NULL if failed.
|
||||
Must be overridden in derived handlers.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param fs
|
||||
Parent FS (the FS from that OpenFile was called). See ZIP handler
|
||||
for details of how to use it.
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
554
interface/font.h
554
interface/font.h
|
|
@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ public:
|
|||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Creates a font object with the specified attributes.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param pointSize
|
||||
Size in points.
|
||||
@param pixelSize
|
||||
|
|
@ -53,123 +53,123 @@ public:
|
|||
@param family
|
||||
Font family, a generic way of referring to fonts without specifying actual
|
||||
facename. One of:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTFAMILY_DEFAULT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Chooses a default font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTFAMILY_DECORATIVE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A decorative font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTFAMILY_ROMAN
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A formal, serif font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTFAMILY_SCRIPT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A handwriting font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTFAMILY_SWISS
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A sans-serif font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTFAMILY_MODERN
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A fixed pitch font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTFAMILY_TELETYPE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A teletype font.
|
||||
@param style
|
||||
One of wxFONTSTYLE_NORMAL, wxFONTSTYLE_SLANT and wxFONTSTYLE_ITALIC.
|
||||
@param weight
|
||||
Font weight, sometimes also referred to as font boldness. One of:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTWEIGHT_NORMAL
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Normal font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTWEIGHT_LIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Light font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTWEIGHT_BOLD
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Bold font.
|
||||
@param underline
|
||||
The value can be @true or @false. At present this has an effect on Windows
|
||||
|
|
@ -180,75 +180,75 @@ public:
|
|||
a default typeface will be chosen based on the family.
|
||||
@param encoding
|
||||
An encoding which may be one of
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTENCODING_SYSTEM
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Default system encoding.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTENCODING_DEFAULT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Default application encoding: this
|
||||
is the encoding set by calls to
|
||||
SetDefaultEncoding and which may be set to,
|
||||
say, KOI8 to create all fonts by default with KOI8 encoding. Initially, the
|
||||
default application encoding is the same as default system encoding.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTENCODING_ISO8859_1...15
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ISO8859 encodings.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTENCODING_KOI8
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The standard Russian encoding for Internet.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTENCODING_CP1250...1252
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Windows encodings similar to ISO8859 (but not identical).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
If the specified encoding isn't available, no font is created
|
||||
(see also font encoding overview).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks If the desired font does not exist, the closest match will be
|
||||
chosen. Under Windows, only scalable TrueType fonts are
|
||||
used.
|
||||
|
|
@ -271,7 +271,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Destructor.
|
||||
See @ref overview_refcountdestruct "reference-counted object destruction" for
|
||||
more info.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Although all remaining fonts are deleted when the application
|
||||
exits, the application should try to clean up all fonts
|
||||
itself. This is because wxWidgets cannot know if a
|
||||
|
|
@ -282,7 +282,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the current application's default encoding.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see @ref overview_wxfontencodingoverview, SetDefaultEncoding()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxFontEncoding GetDefaultEncoding();
|
||||
|
|
@ -291,7 +291,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Returns the typeface name associated with the font, or the empty string if
|
||||
there is no
|
||||
typeface information.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetFaceName()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetFaceName() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -299,7 +299,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Gets the font family. See SetFamily() for a list of valid
|
||||
family identifiers.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetFamily()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxFontFamily GetFamily() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -310,7 +310,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Note that the returned string is not meant to be shown or edited by the user: a
|
||||
typical
|
||||
use of this function is for serializing in string-form a wxFont object.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetNativeFontInfo(),GetNativeFontInfoUserDesc()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetNativeFontInfoDesc() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -320,14 +320,14 @@ public:
|
|||
non-empty.
|
||||
Some examples of the formats of returned strings (which are platform-dependent)
|
||||
are in SetNativeFontInfoUserDesc().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetNativeFontInfoDesc()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetNativeFontInfoUserDesc();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the point size.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetPointSize()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetPointSize() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -335,14 +335,14 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Gets the font style. See wxFont() for a list of valid
|
||||
styles.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetStyle()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetStyle() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns @true if the font is underlined, @false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetUnderlined()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetUnderlined() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -350,7 +350,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Gets the font weight. See wxFont() for a list of valid
|
||||
weight identifiers.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetWeight()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxFontWeight GetWeight() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -398,7 +398,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the default font encoding.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see @ref overview_wxfontencodingoverview, GetDefaultEncoding()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void SetDefaultEncoding(wxFontEncoding encoding);
|
||||
|
|
@ -406,106 +406,106 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Sets the facename for the font.
|
||||
Returns @true if the given face name exists; @false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param faceName
|
||||
A valid facename, which should be on the end-user's system.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks To avoid portability problems, don't rely on a specific face,
|
||||
but specify the font family instead or as well. A
|
||||
suitable font will be found on the end-user's system.
|
||||
If both the family and the facename are specified,
|
||||
wxWidgets will first search for the specific face, and
|
||||
then for a font belonging to the same family.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetFaceName(), SetFamily()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool SetFaceName(const wxString& faceName);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the font family.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param family
|
||||
One of:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTFAMILY_DEFAULT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Chooses a default font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTFAMILY_DECORATIVE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A decorative font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTFAMILY_ROMAN
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A formal, serif font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTFAMILY_SCRIPT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A handwriting font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTFAMILY_SWISS
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A sans-serif font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTFAMILY_MODERN
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A fixed pitch font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTFAMILY_TELETYPE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A teletype font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetFamily(), SetFaceName()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetFamily(wxFontFamily family);
|
||||
|
|
@ -519,7 +519,7 @@ public:
|
|||
invalid, font is unchanged. This function is typically used for de-serializing
|
||||
a wxFont
|
||||
object previously saved in a string-form.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetNativeFontInfoUserDesc()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool SetNativeFontInfo(const wxString& info);
|
||||
|
|
@ -531,101 +531,101 @@ public:
|
|||
Unlike SetNativeFontInfo(), this function accepts
|
||||
strings which are user-friendly.
|
||||
Examples of accepted string formats are:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Generic syntax
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Example
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
on @b wxGTK2: @c [FACE-NAME] [bold] [oblique|italic] [POINTSIZE]
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Monospace bold 10
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
on @b wxMSW: @c [light|bold] [italic] [FACE-NAME] [POINTSIZE] [ENCODING]
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Tahoma 10 WINDOWS-1252
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
on @b wxMac: FIXME
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
FIXME
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
For more detailed information about the allowed syntaxes you can look at the
|
||||
documentation of the native API used for font-rendering (e.g. pango_font_description_from_string).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetNativeFontInfo()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool SetNativeFontInfoUserDesc(const wxString& info);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the point size.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param pointSize
|
||||
Size in points.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetPointSize()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetPointSize(int pointSize);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the font style.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param style
|
||||
One of wxFONTSTYLE_NORMAL, wxFONTSTYLE_SLANT and wxFONTSTYLE_ITALIC.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetStyle()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetStyle(int style);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets underlining.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param underlining
|
||||
@true to underline, @false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetUnderlined()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetUnderlined(const bool underlined);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the font weight.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param weight
|
||||
One of:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTWEIGHT_NORMAL
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Normal font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTWEIGHT_LIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Light font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxFONTWEIGHT_BOLD
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Bold font.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetWeight()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetWeight(wxFontWeight weight);
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Get the current font mapper object. If there is no current object, creates
|
||||
one.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Set()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxFontMapper* Get();
|
||||
|
|
@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Return internal string identifier for the encoding (see also
|
||||
wxFontMapper::GetEncodingDescription)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetEncodingFromName()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxString GetEncodingName(wxFontEncoding encoding);
|
||||
|
|
@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Set the current font mapper object and return previous one (may be @NULL).
|
||||
This method is only useful if you want to plug-in an alternative font mapper
|
||||
into wxWidgets.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Get()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static wxFontMapper* Set(wxFontMapper* mapper);
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Validator which can be used for additional date checks.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Control name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the control was successfully created or @false if
|
||||
creation failed.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ public:
|
|||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor, creating the window.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
The window parent. This may be @NULL. If it is non-@NULL, the frame will
|
||||
always be displayed on top of the parent window on Windows.
|
||||
|
|
@ -113,11 +113,11 @@ public:
|
|||
item,
|
||||
allowing the application user to set Motif resource values for
|
||||
individual windows.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks For Motif, MWM (the Motif Window Manager) should be running for
|
||||
any window styles to work (otherwise all styles take
|
||||
effect).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Create()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxFrame();
|
||||
|
|
@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Centres the frame on the display.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param direction
|
||||
The parameter may be wxHORIZONTAL, wxVERTICAL or wxBOTH.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Creates a status bar at the bottom of the frame.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param number
|
||||
The number of fields to create. Specify a
|
||||
value greater than 1 to create a multi-field status bar.
|
||||
|
|
@ -167,14 +167,14 @@ public:
|
|||
wxWidgets.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
The status bar window name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns A pointer to the status bar if it was created successfully, @NULL
|
||||
otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks The width of the status bar is the whole width of the frame
|
||||
(adjusted automatically when resizing), and the height
|
||||
and text size are chosen by the host windowing system.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetStatusText(), OnCreateStatusBar(), GetStatusBar()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual wxStatusBar* CreateStatusBar(int number = 1,
|
||||
|
|
@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Creates a toolbar at the top or left of the frame.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param style
|
||||
The toolbar style. See wxToolBar for a list
|
||||
of valid styles.
|
||||
|
|
@ -193,15 +193,15 @@ public:
|
|||
wxWidgets.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
The toolbar window name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns A pointer to the toolbar if it was created successfully, @NULL
|
||||
otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks By default, the toolbar is an instance of wxToolBar (which is
|
||||
defined to be a suitable toolbar class on each
|
||||
platform, such as wxToolBar95). To use a different
|
||||
class, override OnCreateToolBar().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see CreateStatusBar(), OnCreateToolBar(), SetToolBar(),
|
||||
GetToolBar()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a pointer to the menubar currently associated with the frame (if any).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetMenuBar(), wxMenuBar, wxMenu
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxMenuBar* GetMenuBar() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -225,28 +225,28 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Returns a pointer to the status bar currently associated with the frame (if
|
||||
any).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see CreateStatusBar(), wxStatusBar
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxStatusBar* GetStatusBar() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the status bar pane used to display menu and toolbar help.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetStatusBarPane()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetStatusBarPane();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns a pointer to the toolbar currently associated with the frame (if any).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see CreateToolBar(), wxToolBar, SetToolBar()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxToolBar* GetToolBar() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Virtual function called when a status bar is requested by CreateStatusBar().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param number
|
||||
The number of fields to create.
|
||||
@param style
|
||||
|
|
@ -257,13 +257,13 @@ public:
|
|||
wxWidgets.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
The window name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns A status bar object.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks An application can override this function to return a different
|
||||
kind of status bar. The default implementation returns
|
||||
an instance of wxStatusBar.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see CreateStatusBar(), wxStatusBar.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual wxStatusBar* OnCreateStatusBar(int number, long style,
|
||||
|
|
@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Virtual function called when a toolbar is requested by CreateToolBar().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param style
|
||||
The toolbar style. See wxToolBar for a list
|
||||
of valid styles.
|
||||
|
|
@ -281,13 +281,13 @@ public:
|
|||
wxWidgets.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
The toolbar window name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns A toolbar object.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks An application can override this function to return a different
|
||||
kind of toolbar. The default implementation returns an
|
||||
instance of wxToolBar.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see CreateToolBar(), wxToolBar.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual wxToolBar* OnCreateToolBar(long style, wxWindowID id,
|
||||
|
|
@ -295,7 +295,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Simulate a menu command.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
The identifier for a menu item.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -314,22 +314,22 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Tells the frame to show the given menu bar.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param menuBar
|
||||
The menu bar to associate with the frame.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks If the frame is destroyed, the menu bar and its menus will be
|
||||
destroyed also, so do not delete the menu bar
|
||||
explicitly (except by resetting the frame's menu bar to
|
||||
another frame or @NULL).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetMenuBar(), wxMenuBar, wxMenu.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetMenuBar(wxMenuBar* menuBar);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Associates a status bar with the frame.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see CreateStatusBar(), wxStatusBar, GetStatusBar()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetStatusBar(wxStatusBar* statusBar);
|
||||
|
|
@ -342,21 +342,21 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the status bar text and redraws the status bar.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param text
|
||||
The text for the status field.
|
||||
@param number
|
||||
The status field (starting from zero).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks Use an empty string to clear the status bar.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see CreateStatusBar(), wxStatusBar
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void SetStatusText(const wxString& text, int number = 0);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the widths of the fields in the status bar.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param n
|
||||
The number of fields in the status bar. It must be the
|
||||
same used in CreateStatusBar.
|
||||
|
|
@ -366,7 +366,7 @@ public:
|
|||
least one
|
||||
field must be -1. You should delete this array after calling
|
||||
SetStatusWidths.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks The widths of the variable fields are calculated from the total
|
||||
width of all fields, minus the sum of widths of the
|
||||
non-variable fields, divided by the number of variable
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Note that you must use a @a type value (aka image format)
|
||||
that wxWidgets can save (e.g. JPG, PNG, see wxImage
|
||||
documentation())!
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see AddFileWithMimeType()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void AddFile(const wxString& filename, wxImage& image,
|
||||
|
|
@ -96,9 +96,9 @@ public:
|
|||
Like AddFile(), but lets you explicitly
|
||||
specify added file's MIME type. This version should be used whenever you know
|
||||
the MIME type, because it makes accessing the files faster.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@wxsince{2.8.5}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see AddFile()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void AddFileWithMimeType(const wxString& filename,
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ public:
|
|||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor, creating and showing a gauge.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Window parent.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
|
|
@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Gauge style. See wxGauge.
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Window name.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see Create()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGauge();
|
||||
|
|
@ -94,32 +94,32 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the width of the 3D bezel face.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks This method is not implemented (returns 0) for most platforms.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetBezelFace()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetBezelFace() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the maximum position of the gauge.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetRange()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetRange() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the 3D shadow margin width.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks This method is not implemented (returns 0) for most platforms.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetShadowWidth()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetShadowWidth() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the current position of the gauge.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see SetValue()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetValue() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -141,10 +141,10 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the 3D bezel face width.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks This method is not implemented (doesn't do anything) for most
|
||||
platforms.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetBezelFace()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetBezelFace(int width);
|
||||
|
|
@ -152,14 +152,14 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Sets the range (maximum value) of the gauge.
|
||||
This function makes the gauge switch to determinate mode, if it's not already.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetRange()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetRange(int range);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the 3D shadow width.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks This method is not implemented (doesn't do anything) for most
|
||||
platforms.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -170,10 +170,10 @@ public:
|
|||
range as returned by GetRange(), inclusive.
|
||||
This function makes the gauge switch to determinate mode, if it was in
|
||||
indeterminate mode before.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param pos
|
||||
Position for the gauge level.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetValue()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetValue(int pos);
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ class wxGLContext : public wxObject
|
|||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Constructor.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param win
|
||||
The canvas that is used to initialize this context. This parameter is
|
||||
needed only temporarily,
|
||||
|
|
@ -121,9 +121,9 @@ public:
|
|||
Creates a window with the given parameters. Notice that you need to create and
|
||||
use a wxGLContext to output to this window.
|
||||
If
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param attribList is not specified, double buffered RGBA mode is used.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
parent
|
||||
Pointer to a parent window.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
|
|
@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Determines if a canvas having the specified attributes is available.
|
||||
Returns @true if attributes are supported.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param attribList
|
||||
See attribList for wxGLCanvas().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ class wxGraphicsPath : public wxGraphicsObject
|
|||
public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void AddArc(wxDouble x, wxDouble y, wxDouble r,
|
||||
wxDouble startAngle,
|
||||
|
|
@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void AddCurveToPoint(wxDouble cx1, wxDouble cy1, wxDouble cx2,
|
||||
wxDouble cy2,
|
||||
|
|
@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void AddLineToPoint(wxDouble x, wxDouble y);
|
||||
void AddLineToPoint(const wxPoint2DDouble& p);
|
||||
|
|
@ -220,7 +220,7 @@ public:
|
|||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Creates a wxGraphicsContext from a wxWindow.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxGraphicsRenderer:: CreateContext
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGraphicsContext* Create(const wxWindowDC& dc);
|
||||
|
|
@ -242,9 +242,9 @@ public:
|
|||
Creates a wxGraphicsContext from a native context. This native context must be
|
||||
eg a CGContextRef for Core Graphics, a Graphics pointer for GDIPlus or a
|
||||
cairo_t pointer for cairo.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Creates a wxGraphicsContext from a native window.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxGraphicsRenderer:: CreateContextFromNativeContext
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGraphicsContext* CreateFromNative(void* context);
|
||||
|
|
@ -617,7 +617,7 @@ class wxGraphicsMatrix : public wxGraphicsObject
|
|||
public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Concat(const wxGraphicsMatrix* t);
|
||||
void Concat(const wxGraphicsMatrix& t);
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
296
interface/grid.h
296
interface/grid.h
|
|
@ -70,27 +70,27 @@ class wxGridTableBase : public wxObject
|
|||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridTableBase();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
~wxGridTableBase();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool AppendCols(size_t numCols = 1);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool AppendRows(size_t numRows = 1);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool CanGetValueAs(int row, int col, const wxString& typeName);
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -101,22 +101,22 @@ public:
|
|||
bool CanHaveAttributes();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool CanSetValueAs(int row, int col, const wxString& typeName);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Clear();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool DeleteCols(size_t pos = 0, size_t numCols = 1);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool DeleteRows(size_t pos = 0, size_t numRows = 1);
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -132,12 +132,12 @@ public:
|
|||
wxGridCellAttrProvider* GetAttrProvider() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetColLabelValue(int col);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetNumberCols();
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ public:
|
|||
int GetNumberRows();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetRowLabelValue(int row);
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -157,12 +157,12 @@ public:
|
|||
wxString GetTypeName(int row, int col);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxString GetValue(int row, int col);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool GetValueAsBool(int row, int col);
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -173,32 +173,32 @@ public:
|
|||
const wxString& typeName);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double GetValueAsDouble(int row, int col);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
long GetValueAsLong(int row, int col);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGrid* GetView() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool InsertCols(size_t pos = 0, size_t numCols = 1);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool InsertRows(size_t pos = 0, size_t numRows = 1);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsEmptyCell(int row, int col);
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ public:
|
|||
void SetAttrProvider(wxGridCellAttrProvider* attrProvider);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetColAttr(wxGridCellAttr* attr, int col);
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ public:
|
|||
void SetColLabelValue() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetRowAttr(wxGridCellAttr* attr, int row);
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -234,28 +234,28 @@ public:
|
|||
void SetRowLabelValue() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetValue(int row, int col, const wxString& value);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetValueAsBool(int row, int col, bool value);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetValueAsCustom(int row, int col, const wxString& typeName,
|
||||
void* value);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetValueAsDouble(int row, int col, double value);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetValueAsLong(int row, int col, long value);
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -265,7 +265,7 @@ public:
|
|||
void SetView(wxGrid* grid);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void UpdateAttrCols(size_t pos, int numCols);
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -297,7 +297,7 @@ class wxGridCellEditor
|
|||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridCellEditor();
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -341,7 +341,7 @@ public:
|
|||
void HandleReturn(wxKeyEvent& event);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsCreated();
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -489,7 +489,7 @@ class wxGridEditorCreatedEvent : public wxCommandEvent
|
|||
public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridEditorCreatedEvent();
|
||||
wxGridEditorCreatedEvent(int id, wxEventType type,
|
||||
|
|
@ -545,7 +545,7 @@ class wxGridRangeSelectEvent : public wxNotifyEvent
|
|||
public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridRangeSelectEvent();
|
||||
wxGridRangeSelectEvent(int id, wxEventType type,
|
||||
|
|
@ -638,7 +638,7 @@ class wxGridCellRenderer
|
|||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridCellRenderer* Clone() const;
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -717,7 +717,7 @@ class wxGridSizeEvent : public wxNotifyEvent
|
|||
public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridSizeEvent();
|
||||
wxGridSizeEvent(int id, wxEventType type, wxObject* obj,
|
||||
|
|
@ -817,7 +817,7 @@ public:
|
|||
wxGridCellAttr* Clone() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void DecRef();
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -827,52 +827,52 @@ public:
|
|||
void GetAlignment(int* hAlign, int* vAlign) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxColour GetBackgroundColour() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridCellEditor* GetEditor(wxGrid* grid, int row, int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxFont GetFont() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridCellRenderer* GetRenderer(wxGrid* grid, int row, int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
const wxColour GetTextColour() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasAlignment() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasBackgroundColour() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasEditor() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasFont() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool HasRenderer() const;
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -889,7 +889,7 @@ public:
|
|||
void IncRef();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool IsReadOnly() const;
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -906,12 +906,12 @@ public:
|
|||
void SetBackgroundColour(const wxColour& colBack);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetDefAttr(wxGridCellAttr* defAttr);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetEditor(wxGridCellEditor* editor);
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -921,7 +921,7 @@ public:
|
|||
void SetFont(const wxFont& font);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetReadOnly(bool isReadOnly = true);
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -976,7 +976,7 @@ class wxGridEvent : public wxNotifyEvent
|
|||
public:
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridEvent();
|
||||
wxGridEvent(int id, wxEventType type, wxObject* obj,
|
||||
|
|
@ -1205,25 +1205,25 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
AutoSizeColumn()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
AutoSizeRow()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
AutoSizeColumns()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
AutoSizeRows()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
AutoSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetColMinimalWidth()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetRowMinimalHeight()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetColMinimalAcceptableWidth()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetRowMinimalAcceptableHeight()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetColMinimalAcceptableWidth()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetRowMinimalAcceptableHeight()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -1236,7 +1236,7 @@ public:
|
|||
EndBatch(). Code that does a lot of grid
|
||||
modification can be enclosed between BeginBatch and EndBatch calls to avoid
|
||||
screen flicker. The final EndBatch will cause the grid to be repainted.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxGridUpdateLocker
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void BeginBatch();
|
||||
|
|
@ -1296,29 +1296,29 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
EnableDragRowSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
EnableDragColSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CanDragRowSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CanDragColSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
EnableDragColMove()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CanDragColMove()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
EnableDragGridSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CanDragGridSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetColAt()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetColPos()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetColPos()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
EnableDragCell()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CanDragCell()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -1348,11 +1348,11 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ref ctor() wxGrid
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ref dtor() ~wxGrid
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CreateGrid()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetTable()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -1371,23 +1371,23 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
MoveCursorUp()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MoveCursorDown()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MoveCursorLeft()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MoveCursorRight()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MoveCursorPageUp()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MoveCursorPageDown()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MoveCursorUpBlock()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MoveCursorDownBlock()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MoveCursorLeftBlock()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MoveCursorRightBlock()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -1505,7 +1505,7 @@ public:
|
|||
EndBatch. Code that does a lot of grid modification can be enclosed between
|
||||
BeginBatch and EndBatch calls to avoid screen flicker. The final EndBatch will
|
||||
cause the grid to be repainted.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxGridUpdateLocker
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void EndBatch();
|
||||
|
|
@ -1533,7 +1533,7 @@ public:
|
|||
grid cell at the specified location.
|
||||
Horizontal alignment will be one of wxALIGN_LEFT, wxALIGN_CENTRE or
|
||||
wxALIGN_RIGHT.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Vertical alignment will be one of wxALIGN_TOP, wxALIGN_CENTRE or wxALIGN_BOTTOM.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void GetCellAlignment(int row, int col, int* horiz, int* vert) const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -1605,7 +1605,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Sets the arguments to the current column label alignment values.
|
||||
Horizontal alignment will be one of wxALIGN_LEFT, wxALIGN_CENTRE or
|
||||
wxALIGN_RIGHT.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Vertical alignment will be one of wxALIGN_TOP, wxALIGN_CENTRE or wxALIGN_BOTTOM.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void GetColLabelAlignment(int* horiz, int* vert) const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -1626,7 +1626,7 @@ public:
|
|||
wxString GetColLabelValue(int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetColLeft(int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -1648,7 +1648,7 @@ public:
|
|||
int GetColPos(int colID) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetColRight(int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -1662,7 +1662,7 @@ public:
|
|||
values.
|
||||
Horizontal alignment will be one of wxALIGN_LEFT, wxALIGN_CENTRE or
|
||||
wxALIGN_RIGHT.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Vertical alignment will be one of wxALIGN_TOP, wxALIGN_CENTRE or wxALIGN_BOTTOM.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void GetDefaultCellAlignment(int* horiz, int* vert) const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -1702,14 +1702,14 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridCellEditor* GetDefaultEditorForCell(int row, int col) const;
|
||||
const wxGridCellEditor* GetDefaultEditorForCell(const wxGridCellCoords& c) const;
|
||||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridCellEditor* GetDefaultEditorForType(const wxString& typeName) const;
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -1717,7 +1717,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Returns the pen used for grid lines. This virtual function may be overridden in
|
||||
derived classes in order to change the appearance of grid lines. Note that
|
||||
currently the pen width must be 1.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetColGridLinePen(), GetRowGridLinePen()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxPen GetDefaultGridLinePen();
|
||||
|
|
@ -1731,12 +1731,12 @@ public:
|
|||
wxGridCellRenderer* GetDefaultRenderer() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridCellRenderer* GetDefaultRendererForCell(int row, int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridCellRenderer* GetDefaultRendererForType(const wxString& typeName) const;
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -1762,7 +1762,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the colour used for grid lines.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetDefaultGridLinePen()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxColour GetGridLineColour() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -1796,7 +1796,7 @@ public:
|
|||
int GetNumberRows() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxGridCellAttr* GetOrCreateCellAttr(int row, int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -1811,7 +1811,7 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Sets the arguments to the current row label alignment values.
|
||||
Horizontal alignment will be one of wxLEFT, wxCENTRE or wxRIGHT.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Vertical alignment will be one of wxTOP, wxCENTRE or wxBOTTOM.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void GetRowLabelAlignment(int* horiz, int* vert) const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -1838,7 +1838,7 @@ public:
|
|||
int GetRowMinimalAcceptableHeight() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetRowMinimalHeight(int col) const;
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -1849,14 +1849,14 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of pixels per horizontal scroll increment. The default is 15.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetScrollLineY(), SetScrollLineX(), SetScrollLineY()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetScrollLineX() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Returns the number of pixels per vertical scroll increment. The default is 15.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetScrollLineX(), SetScrollLineX(), SetScrollLineY()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetScrollLineY() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -1894,7 +1894,7 @@ public:
|
|||
wxGridCellCoordsArray GetSelectionBlockTopLeft() const;
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxColour GetSelectionForeground() const;
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -1915,17 +1915,17 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
EnableGridLines()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GridLinesEnabled()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetGridLineColour()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetGridLineColour()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetDefaultGridLinePen()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetRowGridLinePen()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetColGridLinePen()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -2149,57 +2149,57 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
SetRowLabelValue()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetColLabelValue()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetRowLabelValue()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetColLabelValue()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetUseNativeColLabels()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
HideColLabels()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
HideRowLabels()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetRowLabelSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetColLabelSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetRowLabelSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetColLabelSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
AutoSizeRowLabelSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
AutoSizeColLabelSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetDefaultRowLabelSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetDefaultColLabelSize()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetRowLabelAlignment()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetColLabelAlignment()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetRowLabelAlignment()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetColLabelAlignment()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetLabelFont()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetLabelTextColour()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetLabelBackgroundColour()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetLabelFont()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetLabelBackgroundColour()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetLabelTextColour()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SetColLabelTextOrientation()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GetColLabelTextOrientation()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -2249,15 +2249,15 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
ClearSelection()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IsSelection()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SelectAll()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SelectBlock()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SelectCol()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SelectRow()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -2274,7 +2274,7 @@ public:
|
|||
location.
|
||||
Horizontal alignment should be one of wxALIGN_LEFT, wxALIGN_CENTRE or
|
||||
wxALIGN_RIGHT.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Vertical alignment should be one of wxALIGN_TOP, wxALIGN_CENTRE or
|
||||
wxALIGN_BOTTOM.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -2283,7 +2283,7 @@ public:
|
|||
//@}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetCellBackgroundColour(int row, int col,
|
||||
const wxColour& colour);
|
||||
|
|
@ -2539,7 +2539,7 @@ public:
|
|||
int SetOrCalcColumnSizes(bool calcOnly, bool setAsMin = true);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int SetOrCalcRowSizes(bool calcOnly, bool setAsMin = true);
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -2619,7 +2619,7 @@ public:
|
|||
Sets the number of pixels per horizontal scroll increment. The default is 15.
|
||||
Sometimes wxGrid has trouble setting the scrollbars correctly due to rounding
|
||||
errors: setting this to 1 can help.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetScrollLineX(), GetScrollLineY(), SetScrollLineY()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetScrollLineX(int x);
|
||||
|
|
@ -2628,24 +2628,24 @@ public:
|
|||
Sets the number of pixels per vertical scroll increment. The default is 15.
|
||||
Sometimes wxGrid has trouble setting the scrollbars correctly due to rounding
|
||||
errors: setting this to 1 can help.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetScrollLineX(), GetScrollLineY(), SetScrollLineX()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetScrollLineY(int y);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetSelectionBackground(const wxColour& c);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetSelectionForeground(const wxColour& c);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Set the selection behaviour of the grid.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param wxGridSelectCells()
|
||||
The default mode where individual cells are selected.
|
||||
@param wxGridSelectRows()
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ public:
|
|||
@e WinHelp, MS HTML Help @a sectionNo is a context id.
|
||||
@e External HTML help: wxExtHelpController implements @a sectionNo as an id in
|
||||
a map file, which is of the form:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@e wxHtmlHelpController: @a sectionNo is an identifier as specified in the @c
|
||||
.hhc file. See @ref overview_helpformat "Help files format".
|
||||
See also the help sample for notes on how to specify section numbers for
|
||||
|
|
@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ public:
|
|||
wxHtmlHelpController returns the frame, size and position.
|
||||
For all other help controllers, this function does nothing
|
||||
and just returns @NULL.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param viewer
|
||||
This defaults to "netscape" for wxExtHelpController.
|
||||
@param flags
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ public:
|
|||
wxVListBox::SetSelectionBackground allows to
|
||||
change the selection background for all cells at once and doing anything more
|
||||
fancy is probably going to look strangely.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetSelectedTextColour()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
wxColour GetSelectedTextBgColour(const wxColour& colBg) const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ public:
|
|||
look inside selection. By default all original colours are completely ignored
|
||||
and the standard, system-dependent, selection colour is used but the program
|
||||
may wish to override this to achieve some custom appearance.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetSelectedTextBgColour(),
|
||||
wxVListBox::SetSelectionBackground, wxSystemSettings::GetColour
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -117,12 +117,12 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Called when the user clicks on hypertext link. Does nothing by default.
|
||||
Overloading this method is deprecated; intercept the event instead.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param n
|
||||
Index of the item containing the link.
|
||||
@param link
|
||||
Description of the link.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see See also wxHtmlLinkInfo.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
virtual void OnLinkClicked(size_t n, const wxHtmlLinkInfo& link);
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ class wxHyperlinkCtrl : public wxControl
|
|||
public:
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Creates the hyperlink control.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param parent
|
||||
Parent window. Must not be @NULL.
|
||||
@param id
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
232
interface/icon.h
232
interface/icon.h
|
|
@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ public:
|
|||
//@{
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Loads an icon from the specified location().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param bits
|
||||
Specifies an array of pixel values.
|
||||
@param width
|
||||
|
|
@ -66,68 +66,68 @@ public:
|
|||
wxIconLocation.
|
||||
@param type
|
||||
May be one of the following:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBITMAP_TYPE_ICO
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Load a Windows icon file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBITMAP_TYPE_ICO_RESOURCE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Load a Windows icon from the resource database.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBITMAP_TYPE_GIF
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Load a GIF bitmap file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBITMAP_TYPE_XBM
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Load an X bitmap file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBITMAP_TYPE_XPM
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Load an XPM bitmap file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The validity of these flags depends on the platform and wxWidgets
|
||||
configuration.
|
||||
If all possible wxWidgets settings are used, the Windows platform supports
|
||||
|
|
@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ public:
|
|||
XPM data, XPM file, and PNG file.
|
||||
Under wxMotif, the available formats are XBM data, XBM file, XPM data, XPM
|
||||
file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@remarks The first form constructs an icon object with no data; an
|
||||
assignment or another member function such as Create or
|
||||
LoadFile must be called subsequently.
|
||||
|
|
@ -168,9 +168,9 @@ public:
|
|||
/**
|
||||
Copies @a bmp bitmap to this icon. Under MS Windows the bitmap
|
||||
must have mask colour set.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
LoadFile()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Wx::Icon-new( width, height, depth = -1 )
|
||||
Wx::Icon-new( name, type, desiredWidth = -1, desiredHeight = -1 )
|
||||
Wx::Icon-newFromBits( bits, width, height, depth = 1 )
|
||||
|
|
@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Gets the width of the icon in pixels.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see GetHeight()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GetWidth() const;
|
||||
|
|
@ -203,86 +203,86 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Loads an icon from a file or resource.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param name
|
||||
Either a filename or a Windows resource name.
|
||||
The meaning of name is determined by the type parameter.
|
||||
@param type
|
||||
One of the following values:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBITMAP_TYPE_ICO
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Load a Windows icon file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBITMAP_TYPE_ICO_RESOURCE
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Load a Windows icon from the resource database.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBITMAP_TYPE_GIF
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Load a GIF bitmap file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBITMAP_TYPE_XBM
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Load an X bitmap file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
wxBITMAP_TYPE_XPM
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Load an XPM bitmap file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The validity of these flags depends on the platform and wxWidgets
|
||||
configuration.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@returns @true if the operation succeeded, @false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@see wxIcon()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool LoadFile(const wxString& name, wxBitmapType type);
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the depth member (does not affect the icon data).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param depth
|
||||
Icon depth.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -290,7 +290,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the height member (does not affect the icon data).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param height
|
||||
Icon height in pixels.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -298,7 +298,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Sets the width member (does not affect the icon data).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param width
|
||||
Icon width in pixels.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
@ -306,7 +306,7 @@ public:
|
|||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
Assignment operator, using @ref overview_trefcount "reference counting".
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@param icon
|
||||
Icon to assign.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
1012
interface/image.h
1012
interface/image.h
File diff suppressed because it is too large
Load diff
Some files were not shown because too many files have changed in this diff Show more
Loading…
Add table
Add a link
Reference in a new issue